Fiat - Ducato - Owners Manual - 2013 - 2013 (2)

DUCATO LUM GB 17-12-2008 9:57 Pagina 1 F I A T D U C A T ENGLISH The data contained in this publication is intended merely as a guide. FIAT reserves the right to modify the models and versions described in this booklet at any time for technical and commercial reasons. If you have any further questions please consult your FIAT dealer. Printed in recycled paper without chlorine. O W N E R H A N D B O O K O WHY CHOOSING GENUINE PARTS We really know your vehicle because we invented, designed and built it: we really know every single detail. At Fiat Professional Service authorised workshops you can find technicians directly trained by us, offering quality and professionalism for all service operations. Fiat Professional workshops are always close to you for the regular servicing operations, season checks and practical recommendations by our experts. With Fiat Professional Genuine Parts you keep the reliability, comfort and performance features of your new vehicle unchanged in time: that's why you bought it for. Always ask for Genuine Parts for the components used on our vehicles; we recommend them because they come from our steady commitment in research and development of highly innovative technologies. For all these reasons: rely on Genuine Parts, because they are the only ones designed by Fiat Professional for your vehicle. SAFETY: BRAKING SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT: PARTICULATE FILTERS, CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE COMFORT: SUSPENSION AND WINDSCREEN WIPERS PERFORMANCE: SPARK PLUGS, INJECTORS AND BATTERIES LINEACCESSORI: ROOF RACK BARS, WHEEL RIMS CHOOSING GENUINE PARTS IS THE MOST NATURAL CHOICE PERFORMANCE G E N U I N E P A R T S COMFORT G E N U I N E P A R T S SAFETY G E N U I N E P A R T S AMBIENT G E N U I N E P A R T S ACCESSORIES G E N U I N E P A R T S VALUES G E N U I N E P A R T S HOW TO RECOGNISE GENUINE PARTS All Genuine Parts undergo strict controls, both during design and manufacturing stages, by specialists using vanguard materials, to test the component reliability. This to guarantee performance and safety for you and your passengers on board, for a long time. Always ask for and make sure a Genuine Part has been used. Dear customer, Thank you for choosing Fiat and congratulations on your choice of a Fiat Ducato. We have written this handbook to help you get to know all the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way. You are recommended to read it right through before taking to the road for the first time. You will find information, tips and important warnings regarding the use of your vehicle to help you get the most from the technical features of your Fiat Ducato. Read the warnings and indications, marked with the following symbols: personal safety; vehicle integrity; environmental protection. The enclosed Warranty Booklet lists the services that Fiat offers to its Customers: ❒ the Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for maintaining its validity; ❒ the range of additional services available to Fiat Customers. Enjoy reading. Happy motoring! This Owner Handbook describes all the versions of the Fiat Ducato. As a consequence, you should only consider the information which is related to the trim level, engine and version that you have purchased. VERY IMPORTANT REFUELLING Only refuel with automotive diesel conforming to the European specification EN590. The use of other products or mixtures may damage the engine beyond repair and consequently invalidate the warranty, due to the damage caused. STARTING THE ENGINE Make sure that the handbrake is engaged; set the gear lever to neutral; fully depress the clutch without pressing the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to MAR-ON and wait for the warning lights and to switch off; turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as soon as the engine has started. PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other flammable material: fire hazard. RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT The vehicle is fitted with a system that allows continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect the environment. ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES If, after buying the vehicle, you decide to add electrical accessories (with the risk of gradually draining the battery), visit a Fiat Dealership. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle's electrical system can support the required load. SCHEDULED SERVICING Correct maintenance enables the vehicle to perfectly maintain performance and safety characteristics, its environmental friendliness and low running costs over time. THE OWNER MANUAL CONTAINS… ... important information, advice and warnings for correct use, driving safety and maintenance of your vehicle over time. Special attention must be paid to the symbols (safety of persons) (environmental protection) (vehicle integrity). KNOW YOUR VEHICLE KNOW YOUR VEHICLE INSTRUMENT PANEL The presence and position of the controls, instruments and indicators may vary according to the different versions. SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE fig. 1 F0N0510M 1. Fixed side air vents – 2. Adjustable side air vents – 3. Left stalk: external light control – 4. Instrument panel and warning lights – 5. Right stalk: windscreen wiper, rear window wiper, trip computer controls – 6. Adjustable centre air vents – 7. Car radio (for versions/markets, where provided) – 8. Passenger side glove compartment/front air bag (for versions/markets, where provided) – 9. Glove compartment – 10. Cigar lighter/12 V socket – 11. Heating/ventilation/climate control system controls – 12. Controls in the dashboard – 13. Gear lever – 14. Ignition device – 15. Steering wheel adjustment lever – 16. Driver's front air bag/Horn – 17. Control plate: lamp/headlamp alignment adjustment/digital display/multifunction display. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 3 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY SYMBOLS THE FIAT CODE SYSTEM Special coloured labels have been attached near or on some of the components of your vehicle. These labels bear symbols that draw your attention to the precautions required when handling the component in question. A plate summarising these symbols can be found under the bonnet fig. 2. This is an electrical engine immobiliser system which increases protection against attempted theft of the vehicle. It is automatically activated when the ignition key is removed. Each key contains an electronic device which modulates the signal emitted during ignition by an antenna built into the ignition device. The modulated signal, which changes each time the engine is started, is the “password”, by means of which the control unit recognises the key and enables to start the engine. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES OPERATION Each time the vehicle is started turning the ignition key to MAR-ON, the Fiat CODE system control unit sends a recognition code to the engine control unit to deactivate the inhibitor. The recognition code is sent only if the Fiat CODE system control unit has recognised the code transmitted from the key. Each time the ignition key is turned to STOP, the Fiat CODE system deactivates the functions of the engine management control unit. If the code has not been recognised correctly, the warning light turns on accompanied by the related message on the display (see section “Warning lights and messages”). IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 4 fig. 2 F0N0002 In this case, turn the key to STOP and then to MAR-ON; if it is still locked, try again with the other keys that come with the vehicle. Contact a Fiat Dealership if you still cannot start the engine. IMPORTANT Each key has its own code which must be stored by the system's electronic control unit. Contact the Fiat Dealership to have new keys (up to eight) stored with the code. Warning light switching on while driving ❒ If the warning light switches on, this means that the system is running a self-diagnosis (for example for a voltage drop). ❒ If the warning light stays on, contact a Fiat Dealership. THE KEYS KNOW YOUR VEHICLE CODE CARD The vehicle is delivered with two copies of the ignition key and with the CODE card fig. 3, which bears the following: A the electronic code; B the mechanical key code to be given to the Fiat Dealership when ordering duplicate keys. IMPORTANT In order to ensure complete efficiency of the electronic devices inside the keys, they should never be exposed to direct sunlight. All the keys and the CODE card must be handed over to the new owner when selling the vehicle. The electronic components inside the key may be damaged if the key is subjected to strong shocks. SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 3 F0N0003 5 KEY WITH REMOTE CONTROL KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES WARNING The metal insert A fig. 4 fig. 5 is retractable in the grip and it operates: ❒ the ignition switch; ❒ the door locks; ❒ opening and closing of the fuel tank cap. To extract the metal insert, press button B fig. 4 fig. 5. To refit it in the grip proceed as follows: ❒ hold down button B and turn the metal insert A; ❒ release button B and turn the metal insert A completely until the locking click is heard to ensure correct closure. Button B should only be pressed when the key is away from the body, in particular from the eyes and from objects that can be spoilt (e.g. clothes). Do not leave the key unattended to avoid the button being accidentally pressed while it is being handled, e.g. by a child. Button is used for unlocking the front doors. Button is used for locking all the doors. Button is used for unlocking the load compartment doors. When unlocking the doors, the internal lights will come on for a preset time. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 6 fig. 4 F0N0800 fig. 5 F0N0801 For some versions there is a key with remote control and 2 buttons and fig. 5. Button locks all the doors. Button unlocks all the doors. Should a new remote control be necessary, contact a Fiat Dealership and be ready to present the CODE card, a personal identity document and the vehicle ownership documents. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Dashboard LED indications Changing battery - key with remote control fig. 7 SAFETY When locking the doors, the LED A fig. 6 switches on for about 3 seconds and then starts flashing (deterrence function). When the doors are locked, if one or more doors are not closed correctly, the LED and direction indicators start flashing quickly. Request for additional remote controls The system can recognise up to 8 keys with incorporated remote control. To replace the remote control battery, proceed as follows: ❒ press button A and open the metal insert B; ❒ turn the screw C to using a fine bit screwdriver; ❒ take out the battery case D and replace the battery E making sure that polarities are correct; ❒ refit the battery case D inside the key and lock it turning the screw C to . STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 6 F0N0114 fig. 7 F0N0802 7 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES Used batteries are harmful to the environment.You can dispose of them either in the correct containers as specified by law or by taking them to a Fiat Dealership, which will deal with their disposal. KEY WITHOUT REMOTE CONTROL The metal insert A fig. 8 of the key is fixed. The key operates: ❒ the ignition switch; ❒ the door locks; ❒ opening and closing of the fuel tank cap. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 8 fig. 8 F0N0337 The main functions that can be activated with the keys (with or without remote control) are the following: Type of key Unlocking the doors Locking the doors from the outside Mechanical key/key with remote control Turn key anticlockwise (driver's side) Turn key clockwise (driver's side) Key with remote control Direction indicators flashing (only with key with remote control) Deterrent LED Briefly press / Briefly press Unlocking of Dead Lock load activation (*) compartment lock Lowering windows (*) Raising windows (*) KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY - Press twice 2 flashes 1 flash 3 flashes Switching off Switching on constantly for about 3 seconds, followed by deterrence LED flashing Double flash, followed by deterrence flashing - Briefly press 2 flashes - - Hold down Hold down (for more than 2 seconds) (for more than 2 seconds) 2 flashes 1 flash STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Deterrence LED flashing Switching off Deterrence LED flashing TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (*)For versions/markets, where provided. IMPORTANT Window opening operation is a consequence of a door unlocking control; window closing operation is a consequence of a door locking control. INDEX 9 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY ELECTRONIC ALARM TURNING THE ALARM ON (for versions/markets, where provided) With the doors and bonnet closed and the ignition key either turned to STOP or removed, point the key with the remote control towards the vehicle and press and release the lock button. Excluding some markets, the system produces an acoustic signal (beep) and enables door locking. The switching on of the alarm is preceded by an self-diagnosis stage: if a fault is detected, the system produces another acoustic signal. In this case, turn the alarm off by pressing the "release doors/release load compartment" button, check that the doors and bonnet are properly closed and turn the alarm back on by pressing the lock button. If a door or the bonnet is not properly shut, it will be excluded from the check by the alarm system. If the alarm produces an acoustic signal even when the doors and bonnet are correctly closed, a fault has occurred in the operation of the system. Contact a Fiat Dealership. The alarm, in addition to all the remote control functions described previously, is controlled by the receiver located under the dashboard near the fuse box. ALARM INTERVENTION STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 10 The alarm intervenes in the following cases: ❒ wrongful opening of a door or the bonnet (perimeter protection); ❒ when the ignition system is started up (ignition key rotated to MAR-ON); ❒ cutting of the battery leads. Depending on the market, the activation of the alarm causes the activation of the siren and the direction indicators (for about 26 seconds). Alarm tripping and the number of cycles depend on the sales market. There is a maximum number of acoustic/visual cycles. When this is reached the system returns to normal operation. IMPORTANT The engine stop function is guaranteed by the Fiat CODE, which is automatically activated when the ignition key is extracted from the ignition switch. IMPORTANT The alarm does not come on when the central locking is activated using the metal insert in the key. IMPORTANT The alarm is adapted to meet requirements in various countries. TURNING THE ALARM OFF Press the “door release/load compartment release” button on the key with remote control. The following operations are performed (excluding some markets): ❒ the direction indicators flash briefly twice; ❒ there are two short acoustic signals (beeps); ❒ unlocking of the doors. IMPORTANT The alarm does not switch off when the central opening is activated using the metal insert in the key. BREAK IN ATTEMPT INDICATION Any break in attempt is indicated by the turning on of warning light Y on the instrument panel together with the message on the multifunction display (where provided), (see section “Warning lights and messages”). IGNITION DEVICE The key can be turned to 3 different positionsfig. 9: ❒ STOP: engine off, key extractable, steering locked. Some electrical devices (e.g. sound system, central door locking system, etc.) can operate; ❒ MAR-ON: driving position. All electrical devices are enabled; ❒ AVV: engine starting (unstable position). The ignition switch is fitted with an electronic safety system that requires the ignition key to be turned back to STOP if the engine will not start, before the starting operation can be repeated. WARNING If the ignition device is tampered with (e.g. attempted theft), have it checked over by a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. DISABLING THE ALARM To permanently disable the alarm (e.g. during a lengthy period of idleness), simply lock the vehicle by turning the metal insert of the key with remote control in the lock. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS IMPORTANT If the batteries of the key with the remote control run out or the system fails, the alarm can be switched off by placing the key in the ignition switch and turning it to MAR-ON. INDEX fig. 9 F0N0007 11 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 12 WARNING Always remove the key when you leave your vehicle to prevent someone from accidentally operating the controls. Remember to engage the handbrake. Engage first gear if the vehicle is parked uphill or reverse gear if the vehicle is parked downhill. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. WARNING Never extract the key while the vehicle is moving.The steering wheel will lock as soon as it is turned.This also applies to cases in which the vehicle is towed. WARNING It is absolutely forbidden to carry out whatever after-market operation involving steering system or steering column modifications (e.g.: installation of anti-theft device) that could badly affect performance and safety, cause the lapse of warranty and also result in non-compliance of the car with type approval requirements. STEERING LOCK Engagement When at STOP, remove the key and turn the steering wheel until it locks. Disengagement Move the steering wheel slightly as you turn the ignition key to MAR-ON. INSTRUMENT PANEL KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES fig. 10 F0N0518 A. Speedometer (speed indicator) B. Multifunction display C. Rev counter D. Engine coolant temperature gauge with overheating warning light E. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 13 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ON BOARD INSTRUMENTS The instrument background colour and type may vary according to the version. SPEEDOMETER (speed indicator) This shows the speed of the vehiclefig. 11. When the engine is idling, the rev counter may indicate a gradual or sudden increase of the engine speed. This is normal and does not indicate a fault. It may be caused, for example, by the operation of the climate control system or the fan. In these cases, a slow change in revs is used to protect the battery charge. REV COUNTER The rev counter fig. 12 shows the number of engine revolutions per minute. IMPORTANT The electronic injection control system gradually shuts off the flow of fuel when the engine is over-revving, resulting in a gradual loss of engine power. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 14 fig. 11 F0N0332 fig. 12 F0N0013 FUEL LEVEL GAUGE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE This shows the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank. E - tank empty. F - tank full (see the description in paragraph "Vehicle refuelling" in this chapter). The warning light A fig. 13 switching on indicates that there are about 10-12 litres of fuel (for versions with tank capacity 90-120 l) or 10 l (for versions with tank capacity 60 l) remaining in the tank. Do not travel with the tank nearly empty to prevent damaging the catalytic converter. The needle shows the temperature of the engine coolant and starts supplying indications when the fluid temperature exceeds approx. 50°C. In normal use, the needle could assume different positions within the scale, depending on the usage conditions. C - Low engine coolant temperature. H - High engine coolant temperature. The warning light B fig. 14 may switch on (with a message on the display for some versions) to indicate that the coolant temperature is too high; in this case, stop the engine and contact a Fiat Dealership. IMPORTANT The needle will point to E and warning light A will flash to indicate a fault in the system. If this is the case, go to a Fiat Dealership to have the system checked. IMPORTANT It is not advisable to activate the additional Webasto heater in reserve conditions. If the needle for the engine coolant temperature reaches the red area, stop the engine immediately and contact a Fiat Dealership. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 13 F0N0014 fig. 14 F0N0015 15 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY ENGINE OIL LEVEL GAUGE (for versions/markets, where provided) The gauge fig. 15 provides a graphic indication of the level of oil in the engine. When the ignition key is turned to MAR-ON, the top line of the display shows the oil level by lighting up / switching off five symbols. The gradual switching off of the symbols indicates a decreasing oil level. Four or five symbols light up to indicate a sufficient level of oil in the sump. If the fifth symbol is not lit, this does not indicate a fault or that insufficient oil is present in the sump. If the oil level is lower than the minimum required value, the display shows a dedicated message indicating minimum engine oil level and the need for a top-up. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 16 fig. 15 F0N1021 IMPORTANT To find out the correct oil quantity, always check using the dipstick (see paragraph “Checking levels” in the section “Maintenance and care”). After a few seconds, the symbol display indicating the amount of engine oil disappears and: ❒ When the next scheduled servicing intervention is approaching, the time to the next service is displayed and the warning light õ lights up on the display. When the service date is reached, the display shows a dedicated message; ❒ Later on, if the time for changing the engine oil is getting close, the distance until the next oil change will appear on the display. When the service interval has expired, a dedicated warning will be shown on the display. MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY (for versions/markets, where provided) The multifunction display is able to display information that is useful and necessary during when driving. "STANDARD" SCREEN The standard screen can display the following information fig. 16: A Date B Milometer (distance covered in km or miles). C Time. D Outside temperature E Headlamp alignment position (only with dipped headlamps on). Note When one of the front doors is opened, the display is activated, showing the time and mileage for a few seconds. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE CONTROL BUTTONS To scroll up through the screen and the related options or to increase the displayed value. SAFETY MODE Press briefly to access the menu and/or go to next screen or confirm the desired menu selection. Hold down to go back to the standard screen. To scroll down through the screen and the related options or to decrease the displayed value. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 16 F0N0519 fig. 17 F0N0017 17 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 18 Note The and buttons activate different functions according to the following situations: Adjusting the vehicle interior lighting - with the side lights on and standard screen active, it is possible to adjust the brightness inside the vehicle. Setup menu - scrolling up or down within the menu; - increasing or decreasing during setting operations. SETUP MENU KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE fig. 18 F0N1020 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 19 Setup menu functions KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 20 The menu fig. 18 comprises a series of functions arranged in a cycle which can be selected through the and buttons to access the different selection operations and settings (setup) given in the following paragraphs. A submenu is provided for some items (Setting the clock and Set units). The setup menu can be activated by pressing the MODE button briefly. Single presses of the or buttons permit navigation through the setup menu options. Operating modes differ here according to the characteristics of the option selected. Selecting an option from the main menu without submenu: - by briefly pressing the MODE button you can select the main menu setting that you wish to modify; - by pressing the or buttons (with single presses) you can choose the new setting; - by briefly pressing the MODE button you can store the setting and then return to the same main menu option that was first selected. Selecting an option from the main menu with submenu: - briefly press the MODE button to display the first submenu option; - press the or buttons (with a single press) to scroll through all submenu options; - briefly press the MODE button to select the displayed submenu option and to open the relevant settings menu; - press the or buttons (with a single press) to choose the new setting for this submenu option; - briefly press the MODE button to store the setting and return to the previously selected submenu option. Selecting “Date” and “Set Clock”: - briefly press the MODE button to select the first value to be changed (e.g. hours / minutes or year / month / day); - press the or buttons (with a single press) to select the new setting; - briefly press the MODE button to store the new setting and go to the next settings menu option. If this is the last one, the system brings you back to the previously selected menu option. Hold down the MODE button: - to exit the set-up menu if you are in the main menu; – to exit to the main menu if you are in another point of the menu (e.g. at submenu option setting level, at submenu level or at main menu option setting level); - to save only the changes stored by the user (and confirmed by pressing the MODE button). The setup menu environment is timed; when the menu is exited due to expiry of the time allowed, only the changes already stored by the user (confirmed beforehand by a brief press of the MODE button) will be saved. From the standard screen, briefly press button MODE to start navigation. Press the or buttons to navigate within the menu. Note Only the reduced menu can be accessed while the vehicle is moving for safety reasons ("Speed Beep" setting). Stop the vehicle to access the full menu. Speed limit (Speed Beep) This function can be used to set a vehicle speed limit (km/h or mph). The driver is alerted when this limit is exceeded (see "Warning lights and messages"). To set the desired speed limit, proceed as follows: - briefly press the MODE button: the display will show the wording (Speed Beep); - press the or button to select speed limit activation (On) or deactivation (Off ); - if the function has been activated (On), press the or buttons to select the desired speed limit and then press MODE to confirm. Note Setting is possible between 30 and 200 km/h, or 20 and 125 mph, according to the previously set unit. See the "Setting the unit of measurement (Measurement unit)" paragraph described below. The setting will increase/decrease by 5 units each time button / is pressed. Hold down the / button to automatically increase/decrease the setting rapidly. Complete the adjustment with single presses of the button when you approach the desired value. - press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu screen or hold the button down to return to the standard screen without storing. To cancel the setting, proceed as follows: - press the MODE button briefly to make the display flash (On); - press the button: (Off) will flash on the display; - briefly press the MODE button to go back to the menu screen or hold the button down to go back to the standard screen without saving. Headlight sensor sensitivity adjustment (for versions/markets, where provided) This function allows you to adjust the headlight sensor sensitivity to 3 levels. To set the desired sensitivity level, proceed as follows: – briefly press the MODE button: the previously set sensitivity “level” starts to flash on the display; – press the or button to adjust; KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 21 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE – press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu screen or hold the button down to return to the standard screen without storing. Trip B activation (TripB data) SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 22 This function can be used to activate (On) or deactivate (Off) the Trip B display (partial trip). For further information see the "Trip computer" paragraph. To activate / deactivate, proceed as follows: - briefly press the MODE button: ON or OFF flashes on the display (depending the previous setting); - press the or button to select; - press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu screen or hold the button down to return to the standard screen without storing. Setting the clock (Set time) This function allows you to set the clock through two submenus: “Time” and “Format”. To adjust, proceed as follows: - briefly press the MODE button and two submenus, "Time" and "Format", will be displayed; - press the or button to switch between the two submenus; - once you have selected the submenu to be changed, press the button MODE briefly; - if you enter the "Time" submenu, pressing the MODE button briefly makes the "hours" flash on the display; - press the or button to adjust; - briefly press the MODE button: the "minutes" starts to flash on the display; - press the or button to adjust; – if you enter the "Format" submenu, pressing the MODE button briefly makes the display format flash on the display; - press the or button to select "24h" or "12h" mode. When you have made the adjustment, briefly press the MODE button to go back to the submenu screen or hold the button down to go back to the main menu screen without storing. - hold down the MODE button again to return to the standard screen or to the main menu according to where you are in the menu. Setting the date (Set date) Using this function it is possible to update the date (day - month - year). To update, proceed as follows: - briefly press the MODE button: the day starts flashing on the display (dd); - press the or button to adjust; - briefly press the MODE button: the month starts flashing on the display (mm); - press the or button to adjust; - briefly press the MODE button: the year starts flashing on the display (yyyy); - press the or button to adjust. Note The setting will increase or decrease by one unit each time the or button is pressed. Holding the button down causes an automatic rapid increase/decrease. Complete the adjustment with single presses of the button when you approach the desired value. - press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu screen or hold the button down to return to the standard screen without storing. Audio information display (See radio) With this function, the display shows information about the radio. - Radio: selected station frequency or RDS message, automatic tuning activation or AutoSTore; - Audio CD, MP3 CD: track number; - CD Changer: CD number and track number; To show the sound system information in the display (On) or clear it (Off), proceed as follows: - briefly press the MODE button: ON or OFF flashes on the display (depending the previous setting); - press the or button to select; - press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu screen or hold the button down to return to the standard screen without storing. Automatic central locking with vehicle moving (Autoclose) After activation (On), this function allows the automatic locking of the doors when the speed exceeds 20 km/h. To activate (On) or deactivate (Off) this function, proceed as follows: - briefly press the MODE button to display a submenu; - briefly press the MODE button: ON or OFF flashes on the display (depending the previous setting); - press the or button to select; - press the MODE button briefly to return to the submenu screen or hold the button down to return to the main menu screen without storing; - hold down the MODE button again to return to the standard screen or to the main menu according to where you are in the menu. Setting the unit of measurement (Measurement unit) With this function it is possible to set the unit of measurement using three submenus: "Distance", "Consumption" and "Temperature". To set the unit of measurement, proceed as follows: - briefly press the MODE button to display the three submenus; - press the or button to navigate through the three submenus; KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 23 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 24 - once you have selected the submenu to be changed, press the button MODE briefly; - if you enter the "Distances" submenu, pressing the MODE button briefly makes the display show "km" or "mi" (depending on the previous setting); - press the or button to select; - if you enter the "Consumption" submenu, pressing the MODE button briefly makes "km/l", "l/100km" or "mpg" appear on the display (depending on the previous setting); If the set distance unit is "km", the display enables setting of the fuel consumption unit (km/l or l/100 km). If the set distance unit is "mi", the display shows the amount of fuel consumed in "mpg". - press the or button to select; - if you enter the "Temperature" submenu, pressing the MODE button makes "°C" or "°F" appear on the display (depending on the previous setting); - press the or button to select; When you have made the adjustment, briefly press the MODE button to go back to the submenu screen or hold the button down to go back to the main menu screen without storing. - hold down the MODE button again to return to the standard screen or to the main menu according to where you are in the menu. Language selection (language) Display messages can be shown in different languages: Italian, German, English, Spanish, French, Portuguese and Dutch. To set the desired language, proceed as follows: - briefly press the MODE button: the previously set "language" starts flashing on the display; - press the or button to select; - press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu screen or hold the button down to return to the standard screen without storing. Adjusting the alert/warning acoustic signal volume (Warning volume) With this function the volume of the buzzer which accompanies the display of failure/warning can be adjusted according to 8 levels. To set the desired volume, proceed as follows: - briefly press the MODE button: the previously set volume "level" will flash on the display; - press the or button to adjust; - press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu screen or hold the button down to return to the standard screen without storing. Adjusting button volume (Button Vol.) This function allows the volume of the acoustic signal that accompanies MODE, and button presses to 8 levels. To set the desired volume, proceed as follows: - briefly press the MODE button: the previously set volume "level" will flash on the display; - press the or button to adjust; - press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu screen or hold the button down to return to the standard screen without storing. SBR buzzer reactivation (Belt Buzzer) This function can be displayed only after a Fiat Dealership has deactivated the SBR system (see "SBR system" in the "Safety" section). Service Scheduled servicing Using this function you can display information about the mileage intervals for car servicing. To consult this information, proceed as follows: – briefly press the MODE button: the display shows when servicing is due in km or mi according to the previous setting (see paragraph “Units of measurement”); – press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu screen or hold the button down to return to the standard screen. Oil change This function displays information regarding the remaining mileage before the next oil change. To consult this information, proceed as follows: – briefly press the MODE button; the display shows the estimated mileage before the next oil change (depending on the driving mode); – press the MODE button briefly to return to the menu screen or hold the button down to return to the standard screen. Note The "Scheduled Servicing Plan" requires the vehicle to be serviced every 30,000 km (or 18,000 mi). This indication will appear automatically, with the key at MAR-ON, starting from 2,000 km (or 1,240 mi) and will be displayed every 200 km (or 124 mi). Oil change notification messages are displayed in the same way. Use the and buttons to alternate between displaying scheduled servicing and engine oil change information. Below 200 km servicing indications are more frequent. The display will be in km or mi depending on the measurement unit settings. When the next scheduled service is approaching, the word “Service” will appear on the display, followed by the number of kilometres or miles left, when the key is turned to MAR-ON. Contact a Fiat Dealership, where the operations in the ""Scheduled servicing plan" will be performed and the message will be reset. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 25 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 26 Note When an oil change is nearly due and the ignition key is turned to MAR-ON, the display will show a dedicated message. Engine performance will decrease if driving is continued in these conditions. When the change is due, the dedicated message will reappear on the display together with the activation of both the and warning lights. Contact a Fiat Dealership. Activating/deactivating front passenger side air bags and side bags for chest protection (Passenger air bag) (for versions/markets, where provided) This function is used to activate/deactivate the front passenger side air bag. Proceed as follows fig. 19: ❒ press the MODE button and, after the message "Bag pass: Off" (to deactivate) or "Bag pass: On" (to activate) is displayed by pressing the and buttons, press the MODE button again; ❒ the confirmation request message will appear on the display; ❒ by pressing the or buttons, select (Yes) (to confirm activation/deactivation) or (No) (to cancel); ❒ press the MODE button briefly and a message confirming the selection will be displayed, then you will return to the menu screen, or hold the button down to return to the standard screen with storing. fig. 19 F0N1030 Exit menu The last function, which closes the cycle of settings listed in the menu screen. Pressing the MODE button briefly will return the display to the standard screen without storing. Press the button to return to the first menu option (Speed Beep). TRIP COMPUTER General information The Trip computer is used to display information on vehicle operation when the ignition key is turned to MAR-ON. This function allows you to define two separate trips, called "Trip A" and "Trip B", for monitoring the "complete mission" (journey) of the vehicle in a reciprocally independent manner. Both functions can be reset (reset means start of a new journey). “Trip A” is used to display the figures relating to: ❒ Outside temperature ❒ Range ❒ Distance covered ❒ Average consumption ❒ Instantaneous consumption ❒ Average speed ❒ Trip time (driving time). "Trip B", available on multifunction display only, is used to display the values relating to: ❒ Distance travelled B ❒ Average consumption B ❒ Average speed B ❒ Trip time B (driving time). KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 27 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING The “Trip B” function may be disabled (see “Activating Trip B”).“Range” and “Instant consumption" parameters cannot be reset. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 28 Shows the approximate average fuel consumption since the start of the new journey. Values displayed Instantaneous consumption (for versions/markets, where provided) External temperature This value shows the fuel consumption. The value is constantly updated. The display will show “- - - -” if the car is parked with the engine running. Indicates the temperature outside the vehicle passenger compartment. Range (for versions/markets where provided) WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES Average consumption (for versions/markets, where provided) This value shows the distance that the car can still cover before needing fuel, assuming that driving style is unvaried. “- - - -” will appear on the display in the following cases: ❒ range value lower than 50 km (or 30 mi) ❒ vehicle is left parked with the engine running for a long time. IMPORTANT The range can be affected by several factors: driving style (see “Driving style” in the “Starting and driving” section), type of route (motorway, towns and cities, mountain roads, etc…), conditions of use (load, tyre pressures, etc…). Trip planning must therefore take the above into account. Distance covered Shows the distance covered since the start of the new journey. Average speed This shows the average car speed as a function of the overall time elapsed since the start of the new mission. Trip time Shows the time elapsed since the start of a new journey. IMPORTANT If there is no information, the Trip computer displays "----" in place of the value. When normal operating conditions are restored, the counting of the various values is resumed, without either zeroing the values displayed prior to the problem, or starting a new mission. TRIP control button The TRIP button, located on the top of the right stalk fig. 20, is used (with ignition key at MAR-ON) to display these values and reset them to start a new mission: ❒ brief press to access the various parameter displays; ❒ long press to reset and then start a new mission. New mission This begins after a reset: ❒ “manual” resetting by the user, by pressing the relevant button; ❒ “automatic” resetting, when the distance travelled reaches 3,999.9 km or 9,999.9 km (depending on the type of display) or when the travel time reaches 99.59 (99 hours and 59 minutes); ❒ after disconnection/reconnection of the battery. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE IMPORTANT The reset operation when “Trip A” details are being displayed only resets the information associated with this function. SAFETY IMPORTANT The reset operation when “Trip B” details are being displayed resets only the information associated with this function. STARTING AND DRIVING Start of journey procedure WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES With ignition key at MAR-ON, press and hold the TRIP button for more than 2 seconds to reset. Exit Trip You can automatically exit the TRIP function once all the values have been displayed or by holding the MODE button down for more than 1 second. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 20 F0N0019 29 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SEATS Height adjustment WARNING All adjustments must be made with the vehicle stationary. The fabric upholstery of your vehicle is designed to withstand the normal wear and tear of your vehicle for a long time. You are however recommended to avoid strong and/or continuous scratching with clothing accessories such as metal buckles, studs,Velcro fastenings and the like, as these items cause stress of the cover fabric that could lead threads to break and damage the upholstery. Lengthwise adjustment SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 30 To raise the seat: whilst sitting, move lever B fig. 21 upwards (front part of the seat) or lever C fig. 21 (rear part of the seat) and shift your body weight away from the part of the seat to be raised. To lower the seat: whilst sitting, move the lever B (front part of the seat) or the lever C (rear part of the seat) upwards and position your body weight on the part of the seat to be lowered. Backrest angle adjustment Turn knob D fig. 21. WARNING For maximum safety, keep the back of your seat upright, lean back into it and make sure the seat belt fits closely across your chest and pelvis. Lift the lever A fig. 21 and push the seat forwards or backwards: in driving position your arms should rest on the rim of the steering wheel. WARNING Once you have released the adjustment lever, always check that the seat is locked on the guides by trying to move it back and forth. If it is not locked, the seat may move unexpectedly and make you lose control of the vehicle. fig. 21 F0N0118 Lumbar adjustment Damper weight adjustment To adjust, operate knob E fig. 22. Use adjustment knob A fig. 23 to set the required setting based on body weight, with settings between 40 kg and 130 kg. SPRUNG SEAT The seat is equipped with a mechanical spring system and hydraulic shock absorber to ensure maximum comfort and safety. The system of springs also effectively absorbs impact from uneven road surfaces. See the description in the "Seats" section for the lengthwise adjustments, height adjustments, backrest adjustment, lumbar adjustment and armrest adjustment. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 22 F0N0147 fig. 23 F0N0139 31 SEATS WITH ADJUSTABLE ARMRESTS KNOW YOUR VEHICLE The driver's seat may be equipped with an armrest that can be raised and is height adjustable. To adjust, use wheel A fig. 24. SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES WARNING SEAT WITH REVOLVING BASE (for versions/markets, where provided) It may be turned through 180° toward the seat on the opposite side. Use the control A fig. 25 to rotate the seat. Before turning, move the seat forward and only then carry out the lengthwise adjustment fig. 26. Before putting on the front seat belts, make sure that the armrests are in vertical position (see "Seat belts" paragraph). WARNING Before unfastening the belts and getting out of the vehicle, ensure that the outer armrest (door side) is fully raised. IN AN EMERGENCY fig. 25 F0N0187 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 32 1 fig. 24 F0N0148 fig. 26 2 F0N0700 REVOLVING SEAT WITH SEAT BELT (for versions/markets, where provided) Backrest angle adjustment KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Operate lever A fig. 28. It is equipped with a seat belt with three anchoring points fig. 27, two adjustable armrests (for the adjustment, see "Seats with adjustable armrests" paragraph) and height-adjustable head restraints (for the adjustment, see "Head restraints" paragraph). Height adjustment Operate controls B fig. 28 or C fig. 28 respectively to raise/lower the front/rear part of the seat. WARNING SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING All adjustments must be made with the vehicle stationary. In particular, while turning the seat, take care that it does not interfere with the handbrake lever. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 27 F0N0173 fig. 28 F0N0174 33 Seat rotation KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY It may be turned through 180° toward the seat on the opposite side and approximately 35° toward the door It may be locked in driving position or at 180°. Use the lever D fig. 29 (on the right side of the seat) to turn the seat. Before turning, move the seat forward and only then carry out the lengthwise adjustment fig. 26. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES WARNING Ensure that the seat is locked in driving position before starting the vehicle. Heated seats (for versions/markets where provided) With the key turned to MAR-ON, press button E fig. 30 to switch the function on/off. FLAP ON BENCH (for versions/markets, where provided) The seat is equipped with a fold-down flap that can be used as a document support surface. To use, the pull tab A fig. 31 and lower the flap. The flap is equipped with two cup holders and a support surface with a paper holder clip. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 34 fig. 29 F0N0175 fig. 30 F0N0213 WARNING Do not place heavy loads on the flap with the vehicle in motion because they could be thrown against the vehicle occupants in the event of sudden braking or impacts, causing severe injury. This gives access to the tray under the seat (see "Tray under seat" paragraph). To make it easier to open the front cover and gain access to the compartment, the seat must be as far back as possible. SAFETY TRAY UNDER SEAT (for versions/markets, where provided) STARTING AND DRIVING A tray A fig. 32 is present under the seat that can be easily removed by withdrawing the hooks on the support base. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES SEAT BASE PLASTIC COVERS (for versions/markets, where provided) The front cover A fig. 33 can be opened by operating the release handle B fig. 33 on the upper part. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE fig. 32 F0N0237 IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 31 F0N0149 fig. 33 F0N0238 35 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY To allow removal of the front cover, it must be turned as far forward as possible and withdrawn from the hooks on the lower side by pulling toward the front of the vehicle. On the one-piece Panorama seat in the second row both side seats are fixed. PANORAMA VERSIONS Lift lever C fig. 34 and fold the backrest forwards. A hard surface on the back of the middle seat is for use as an armrest and table with cup holders. Operate the same lever to reposition the backrest. To fold the backrest of the middle seat in the second row, remove the head restraint to make it easier to adjust the backrest of the middle seat in the first row. Adjustment of passenger seat tilting backrest STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY Turn the knob A fig. 34. Access to second row seats To gain access to the second row of seats, operate the lever B fig. 34 for the right outer side seat in the first row and fold the backrest forward, pushing with your left hand. When the seat is restored to its normal position, it engages with the retaining device without the need to operate the lever again. Folding middle seat backrest (2nd - 3rd row) COMBI VERSIONS Easy Entry Position Raise lever A fig. 35 and tilt the backrest forwards. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 36 fig. 34 F0N0227 fig. 35 F0N0228 Stacked position WARNING Proceed as follows: – remove the head restraints from the easy entry position; – raise lever B fig. 36 (located under lever A fig. 35) with your right hand; – turn the backrest 5° towards the rear; – fold the backrest forward with your left hand. Do not travel with passengers seated in the 3rd row with the 2nd row bench folded over. Do not place objects of any type on the backrest of the 2nd bench with the row folded over: in the event of impact or sharp braking they could be thrown against the occupants of the vehicle casing serious injury. For more information, see the contents of the adhesive plate located under the bench. Removing the bench IMPORTANT At least two people are needed to remove the bench. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 36 F0N0229 fig. 37 F0N0230 37 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING Proceed as follows to remove the bench: from stacked position, operate levers C and D fig. 37, turning them forward (as specified on the adhesive plate located on the lower crossmember); – lift the seat base forward; – bring the seat to an upright position; – from the upright position, operate levers E and F fig. 38 rotating them upwards; – raise the bench from the floor and remove it. WARNING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES When refitting the bench, ensure that it is correctly locked to the floor guides. HEAD RESTRAINTS FRONT On certain versions the head restraints are adjustable in height and they lock automatically in the required position fig. 39. Adjustment ❒ Upwards adjustment: lift the head restraint until it locks. ❒ Downwards adjustment: press the button A fig. 39 and lower the head restraint. To extract the front head restraints press buttons A and B fig. 39 at the side of the two supports simultaneously and release them upwards. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 38 fig. 38 F0N0231 fig. 39 F0N0020 WARNING All adjustments must be carried out only with the vehicle stationary and the engine off. Head restraints must be adjusted so that the head, rather than the neck, rests on them. Only when they are adjusted in this manner can they serve their intended purpose. To take best advantage of the protection provided by the head restraint, adjust the seat back so that you are sitting up straight and your head is as close to the head restraint as possible. STEERING WHEEL The steering wheel position can be adjusted axially. To carry out the adjustment, proceed as follows: ❒ release the lever fig. 40 by pulling it towards the steering wheel (position 2); ❒ adjust the steering wheel; ❒ block the lever by pushing it forwards (position 1). KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING All adjustments must be carried out only with the vehicle stationary and the engine off. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 40 F0N0321 39 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING It is absolutely forbidden to carry out whatever after-market operation involving steering system or steering column modifications (e.g.: installation of anti-theft device) that could badly affect performance and safety, cause the lapse of warranty and also result in non-compliance of the car with type approval requirements. REAR VIEW MIRRORS INTERIOR MIRROR The mirror is fitted with a safety device that causes its release in the event of a violent impact with the passenger. Lever A fig. 41 can be used to move the mirror to two different positions: normal or antiglare. DOOR MIRRORS Mirrors with manual adjustment WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES To adjust the mirrors, manually operate on each of the two glasses of each mirror. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 40 fig. 41 F0N0022 WARNING As the driver's exterior mirror is curved, it may slightly alter the perception of distance of the reflected image. Further, the reflective surface of the lower part of the exterior mirrors is parabolic to increase the field of view.The reflected image size is thus reduced and gives the impression that the reflected item is further away than it actually is. After rotating knob B on the mirror to be adjusted, move it in the direction shown by the arrows to adjust the selected glass. Mirror folding with manual adjustment fig. 43 When required (for example when the mirror causes difficulty in narrow spaces or during an automatic car wash) it is possible to fold the mirrors manually, moving them from position 1 to position 2. If the mirror has been accidentally rotated forwards (position 3), for example due to an impact, it must be manually returned to position 1. Mirrors with electrical adjustment Electrical adjustment can only be carried out with the ignition key in the MAR-ON position. To adjust the mirrors, turn the knob B fig. 42 to one of the four positions: 1 left mirror, 2 right mirror, 3 left wide angle, 4 right wide angle. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE WARNING When driving the mirrors should always remain in position 1. SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 42 F0N0024 fig. 43 F0N0023 41 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY Mirror folding with electrical adjustment fig. 43 - fig. 44 (for versions/markets, where provided) When required (for example when the mirror causes difficulty in narrow spaces or during an automatic car wash) it is possible to fold the mirrors both electrically and manually, moving them from position 1 fig. 43 to position 2. Electrical folding To fold the mirrors electrically, press point 2 of rocker button A fig. 44. To bring the mirrors back to open position, press point 1 of the button. IMPORTANT If the mirrors are folded electrically, they should be returned to the open position electrically: do not try to return the mirrors manually to driving position. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 42 fig. 44 F0N0159 Manual folding To fold the mirrors manually, move them from position 1 fig. 43 to position 2. If the mirrors are folded manually, they can be returned to the open position both manually and electrically. IMPORTANT To bring the mirrors electrically to open position, press point 2 of the rocker button A fig. 44 until an engagement “click” is heard, then press point 1 of the button again. Folding forwards The mirrors can be manually folded forwards (position 3 fig. 43) or brought to open position 2 again manually if they have been accidentally rotated forwards (for example due to an impact). If the mirrors have been rotated forwards manually or due to an impact, they can be returned to open position both manually and electrically. To bring the mirrors electrically to open position, press point 2 of the rocker button A fig. 44 until an engagement “click” is heard, then press point 1 of the button again. IMPORTANT If the mirrors have been manually folded to position 3 fig. 43 by mistake, the mirror moves to an intermediate position. In this case, manually rotate the mirror to position 1, then press point 2 of the rocker button A fig. 44 to return the mirror to position 2 until a “click” is heard, then press point 1 of the button to bring it back to position 1. Defrosting/demisting (for versions/markets, where provided) The mirrors are fitted with resistances that operate when the heated rear window is activated (by pressing the button). IMPORTANT This function is timed and will turn off automatically after several minutes. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 43 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE HEATING AND VENTILATION SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE fig. 45 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 44 F0N0322 1. Upper fixed diffuser - 2. Adjustable centre diffusers - 3. Fixed side diffusers - 4. Adjustable side diffusers - 5. Lower diffusers for front seats. DIFFUSERS KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ADJUSTABLE SIDE AND CENTRAL DIFFUSERS A Fixed diffusers for side windows. B Adjustable side diffusers. C Fixed diffusers. D Adjustable centre diffusers. E Air flow adjustment control. SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING The diffusers A and C cannot be adjusted. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 46 F0N0026 fig. 47 F0N0027 45 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY HEATING AND VENTILATION CONTROLS CONTROLS fig. 48 Air temperature adjustment ring nut A (mixing hot and cold air) Red section = hot air Blue section = cold air to warm the feet and convey slightly cooler air to the dashboard vents, in intermediate temperature conditions; for heating when the outside temperature is very low: to direct as much air as possible to the feet; to warm the feet and demist the windscreen at the same time; for quick windscreen demisting. Fan activation/adjustment knob B Air recirculation on/off knob D 0 = fan off 1-2-3 = fan speed 4 = maximum fan speed When knob D is turned to recirculation is activated. When knob D is turned to recirculation is deactivated. Air distribution ring nut C to convey air to the central and side vents; PASSENGER COMPARTMENT VENTILATION the internal air the internal air To ventilate the passenger compartment well, proceed as follows: ❒ turn the ring nut A to the blue section; ❒ stop internal air recirculation by placing knob D on ; ❒ turn ring nut C to ; ❒ turn knob B to required speed. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING INDEX 46 fig. 48 F0N0514 Proceed as follows: ❒ turn the ring nut A to the red section; ❒ turn the ring nut C to the required position; ❒ turn knob B to required speed. FAST PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING For the fast heating of the passenger compartment, proceed as follows: ❒ turn the ring nut A to the red section; ❒ start internal air recirculation by placing knob D on ; ❒ turn ring nut C to ; ❒ turn knob B to 4 (max. fan speed). Then use the controls to maintain the required comfort conditions and turn the knob D to to turn the air recirculation off and to prevent misting. IMPORTANT With a cold engine, you have to wait for a few minutes to let the system fluid reach optimum operating temperature. IMPORTANT To guarantee rapid demisting/ defrosting, if an additional heater is present (under the front or rear seat on Panorama and Combi versions), if activated, deactivate it using the button F (LED off ) located in the control panel fig. 49. After demisting/defrosting, operate the controls to restore the required comfort conditions. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY Window demisting In the event of considerable external moisture and/or rain and/or large differences in temperature inside and outside the passenger compartment, perform the following preventive window demisting procedure: ❒ turn the ring nut A to the red section; ❒ stop internal air recirculation by placing knob D on ; STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY FRONT WINDOW FAST DEMISTING/ DEFROSTING (WINDSCREEN AND SIDE WINDOWS) SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Proceed as follows: ❒ turn the ring nut A to the red section; ❒ stop internal air recirculation by placing knob D on ; ❒ turn ring nut C to ; ❒ turn knob B to 4 (max. fan speed). TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 49 F0N0500 47 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ❒ turn ring nut C to and consider moving to misting does not occur; ❒ turn knob B to 2nd speed. SAFETY DEMISTING/DEFROSTING OF HEATED REAR WINDOW AND DOOR MIRRORS (for versions/markets, where provided) if STARTING AND DRIVING Press button A fig. 50 to activate this function; once enabled, the light on the button comes on. This function is timed and will turn off automatically after 20 minutes. Press button A again to switch the function off. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers on the inside of the rear window over the heating filaments to avoid damage. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 48 fig. 50 F0N0043 INTERNAL AIR RECIRCULATION ACTIVATION Turn knob D fig. 48 to . It is advisable to switch the internal air recirculation on while standing in queues or in tunnels to prevent the introduction of polluted air. Do not use the function for a long time, particularly if there are many passengers on board, to prevent the windows from misting up. IMPORTANT Internal air recirculation makes it possible to reach the required heating or cooling conditions more quickly depending on the mode selected. Do not use the air recirculation function on rainy/cold days as it would considerably increase the possibility of the windows misting. MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL (for versions/markets, where provided) CONTROLS fig. 51 Air temperature adjustment ring nut A (mixing hot and cold air) Red section = hot air Blue section = cold air to warm the feet and convey slightly cooler air to the dashboard vents, in intermediate temperature conditions; for heating when the outside temperature is very low: to direct as much air as possible to the feet; to warm the feet and demist the windscreen at the same time; for quick windscreen demisting. Air recirculation on/off knob D Fan activation/adjustment knob B Press the button (button LED on) to turn the internal air recirculation on. Press the button again (button LED off ) to turn the internal air recirculation off. 0 = fan off 1-2-3 = fan speed 4 = maximum fan speed Air distribution ring nut C to convey air to the central and side vents; Climate control system on/off button E Press the button (button LED on) to turn the climate control system on. Press the button again (button LED off ) to turn the climate control system off. PASSENGER COMPARTMENT VENTILATION To ventilate the passenger compartment well, proceed as follows: ❒ turn the ring nut A to the blue section; ❒ stop internal air recirculation by placing knob D on ; fig. 51 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX F0N0515 49 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 50 ❒ turn ring nut C to ; ❒ turn knob B to required speed. ❒ turn the ring nut C to the required position; ❒ turn knob B to required speed. CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (cooling) FAST PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING For fast cooling of the passenger compartment, proceed as follows: ❒ turn the ring nut A to the blue section; ❒ start internal air recirculation by placing knob D on ; ❒ turn ring nut C to ; ❒ press button E to turn the climate control system on; the LED on the button will come on; ❒ turn knob B to 4 (maximum fan speed). Cooling adjustment ❒ turn the ring nut A to the right to increase the temperature; ❒ stop internal air recirculation by placing knob D on ; ❒ turn knob B to reduce fan speed. IMPORTANT When the air conditioner compressor button E is pressed, the function is only activated if at least the first fan speed is selected (knob B). PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING Proceed as follows: ❒ turn the ring nut A to the red section; For the fast heating of the passenger compartment, proceed as follows: ❒ turn the ring nut A to the red section; ❒ start internal air recirculation by placing knob D on ; ❒ turn ring nut C to ; ❒ turn knob B to 4 (max. fan speed). Then use the controls to maintain the required comfort conditions and turn the knob D to to turn the air recirculation off and to prevent misting. IMPORTANT With a cold engine, you have to wait for a few minutes to let the system fluid reach optimum operating temperature. FRONT WINDOW FAST DEMISTING/ DEFROSTING (WINDSCREEN AND SIDE WINDOWS) Proceed as follows: ❒ turn the ring nut A to the red section; ❒ turn knob B to 4 (max. fan speed). ; ❒ turn ring nut C to ❒ stop internal air recirculation by placing knob D on ; IMPORTANT To guarantee rapid demisting/ defrosting, if an additional heater/air conditioner is present (under the front or rear seat on Panorama and Combi versions), if activated, deactivate it using the button F fig. 52 (LED off) located in the control panel. After demisting/defrosting, operate the controls to restore the required comfort conditions. IMPORTANT The climate control system is very useful for speeding up demisting since it dehumidifies the air. Adjust the controls as described above and press button E to switch the climate control system on; the LED on the button will light up. Window demisting In the event of considerable external moisture and/or rain and/or large differences in temperature inside and outside the passenger compartment, perform the following preventive window demisting procedure: ❒ turn the ring nut A to the red section; ❒ stop internal air recirculation by placing knob D on ; ❒ turn ring nut C to and consider moving to if misting does not occur; ❒ turn knob B to 2nd speed. IMPORTANT The climate control system is very useful for preventing the windows from misting up in the presence of high humidity since it dries the air sent into the passenger compartment. DEMISTING/DEFROSTING OF HEATED REAR WINDOW AND DOOR MIRRORS (for versions/markets, where provided) Press button A fig. 53 to activate this function; once enabled, the light on the button comes on. This function is timed and will deactivate automatically after 20 minutes. Press button A again to switch the function off. IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers on the inside of the rear window over the heating filaments to avoid damage. fig. 52 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX F0N0500 51 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES INTERNAL AIR RECIRCULATION ACTIVATION SYSTEM SERVICING Turn knob D to . It is advisable to switch the internal air recirculation on while standing in queues or in tunnels to prevent the introduction of polluted air. Do not use the function for a long time, particularly if there are many passengers on board, to prevent the windows from misting up. IMPORTANT Internal air recirculation makes it possible to reach the required heating or cooling conditions more quickly depending on the mode selected. Do not use the air recirculation function on rainy/cold days as it would considerably increase the possibility of the windows misting. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 52 fig. 53 F0N0043 In winter, the climate control system must be turned on at least once a month for about 10 minutes. Before summer, have the system checked at a Fiat Dealership. Note The system uses R134a refrigerant fluid which does not pollute the environment in the event of accidental leakage. Never use R12 fluid, which is not compatible with the system components. AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL (for versions/markets, where provided) GENERAL INFORMATION The automatic climate control system adjusts the temperature, the quantity and the distribution of the air in the passenger compartment. The temperature control is based on the "equivalent temperature": in other words, the system continuously works to keep the comfort level inside the vehicle constant and to compensate for possible variations in outside conditions, including the sun's rays detected by a dedicated sensor. The automatically controlled parameters and functions are: ❒ air temperature at the vents; ❒ air distribution at the vents; ❒ fan speed (continuous variation of the air flow); ❒ compressor activation (for cooling/dehumidifying the air); ❒ air recirculation. All functions may be changed manually. In other words, you may select one or more functions and change the parameters as required. Automatic control of the manually changed functions will be suspended: the system will override your settings only for safety-related reasons (e.g. risk of misting). Manual selections will always take priority over automatic settings and will be stored until the user switches the system back to automatic operation by pressing the AUTO button again except for the cases in which the system will intervene for particular, safety-related reasons. You can adjust one function manually without affecting the automatic control of the others. The temperature of the air sent is always controlled automatically, depending on the temperature set in the display (except when the system is off or in certain conditions when the compressor is switched off ). The system allows the following parameters and functions to be set or altered manually: air temperature, fan speed (continuous variation); air distribution in seven positions; compressor enablement; fast defrosting/demisting function; air recirculation; switching off the system. CONTROLS A AUTO button automatic control of all functions. B Air distribution selection button. C Display. D MAX DEF function control button. E System off button. F Compressor enabling/disabling button. G Air recirculation control button. H Fan speed increase/decrease control buttons. I Temperature increase/decrease control knob. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 53 USING THE CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY The system can be started in different ways, but it is advisable to start by pressing the AUTO button and then turning the knob to set the temperature required on the display. The system will start running automatically in this way and the set temperature will be reached as quickly as possible. The system will adjust the temperature, the quantity and the distribution of the air sent into the passenger compartment and, by managing the recirculation function, the activation of the compressor. During fully automatic operation the only manual intervention required is the possible activation of the following functions: ❒ air recirculation, to keep the function always either on or off; ❒ to speed up demisting/defrosting of windscreen, rear window and external rear view mirrors. During fully automatic system operation, you can change the set temperatures, air distribution and fan speed at any time by using the relevant buttons or knobs: the system will automatically change its settings to adjust to the new requirements. During fully automatic operation (FULL AUTO), the word FULL will disappear if the air distribution and/or flow rate and/or engagement of the compressor and/or recirculation settings are changed. In this way, the functions will switch from automatic to manual control until the AUTO button is pressed again. With one or more functions turned on manually, the adjustment of the intake air temperature continues to be managed automatically, except with the compressor switched off: if this is the case, the temperature of the air sent into the passenger compartment cannot be lower than that of the outside air. CONTROLS Air temperature adjustment knob (I) SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Turn the knob either clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or lower the requested temperature in the passenger compartment. The temperature set is shown on the display. Turn the knob either fully to the right or fully to the left to the extreme HI or LO position to turn the maximum heating or maximum cooling functions on: ❒ HI function (maximum heating): select by turning the temperature knob clockwise beyond the maximum value (32°C). TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 54 fig. 54 F0N0831 This function may be used to heat up the passenger compartment by exploiting the system's potential to the full. In this event, the system stops controlling the temperature automatically and sets the air mixing to maximum heating. The air speed and distribution are fixed. In particular, if the heating fluid is not sufficiently hot, the maximum fan speed does not come on straight away in order to limit the intake of insufficiently hot air to the passenger compartment. All manual settings will be allowed when this function is on. To switch the function off, simply turn the temperature knob counterclockwise and set the required temperature. ❒ LO function (maximum cooling): select by turning the temperature knob anticlockwise beyond the minimum value (16°C). This function may be used to cool down the passenger compartment, exploiting the system's potential to the maximum. In this event, the system stops controlling the temperature automatically and sets the air mixing to maximum cooling. The air speed and distribution are fixed. All manual settings will be allowed when this function is on. To switch the function off, simply turn the temperature knob clockwise and set the required temperature. Air distribution buttons (B) By pressing these buttons, it is possible to set one of the seven possible air distributions manually: Air flow to the windscreen and front side window vents to demist or defrost them. Air flow at central and side dashboard vents to ventilate the chest and the face during the hot season. Air flow to the front and rear footwell vents. Thanks to the natural tendency of hot air to rise, this distribution pattern allows the passenger compartment to warm up as quickly as possible, providing an immediate feeling of warmth. Air flow distributed between footwell vents (hotter air) and central and side dashboard vents (cooler air). This distribution mode is particularly useful in spring and autumn on sunny days. Air flow distributed between the footwell vents and the windscreen and front side window defrosting/demisting vents. This allows an adequate warming of the passenger compartment and prevents the windows from steaming up. Air flow distribution split between the windscreen and front side windows defrosting/ demisting vents and the central and side dashboard vents as well as the footwell vents. This distribution makes it possible to maintain good levels of comfort and keep the passenger compartment sufficiently cool (useful in the summer). KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 55 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 56 Air flow distributed between windscreen and front side window defroster/demister and central and side dashboard vents. This distribution allows good air diffusion and maintains a good level of comfort both in summer and winter. The distribution set is shown by the corresponding LEDs in the selected buttons coming on. To restore automatic control of the air distribution after a manual selection, press the AUTO button. Fan speed adjustment buttons (H) Press the H button to increase or to decrease the fan speed and therefore the amount of air sent into the passenger compartment, though the required temperature remains set. The fan speed is shown by the lit bars on the display: ❒ Maximum fan speed = all the bars lit up; ❒ Minimum fan speed = one bar lit up. The fan can be turned off only if the climate control compressor has been switched off by pressing the F button fig. 54. IMPORTANT To restore automatic control of the fan speed after a manual adjustment, press the AUTO button. IMPORTANT At high vehicle speeds, the dynamic effect may increase the flow of air into the passenger compartment which in this case will not directly correspond to the fan speed bar display. AUTO button (A) (automatic operation) Press the AUTO button to make the system automatically adjust the quantity and distribution of the air introduced into the passenger compartment. All previous manual settings will be cancelled. The message FULL AUTO will appear on the front display in this condition. By manually adjusting at least one of the functions automatically managed by the system (air recirculation, air distribution, fan speed or switching off the air conditioner compressor), the word FULL will disappear from the display, indicating that the system is no longer automatically controlling all the functions (the temperature will still be controlled automatically). IMPORTANT Should the system (after manual settings) no longer be able to guarantee the required temperature set in the passenger compartment, the set temperature value will start flashing to indicate the difficulties the system is experiencing and then the word AUTO will disappear. To restore system automatic control at any time, after one or more manual adjustments, press the AUTO button. Air recirculation on/off button (G) The air recirculation is managed according to the following operating logics: ❒ override on (inside air recirculation always on), indicated by the LED on button G and the symbol on the display; ❒ override off (air recirculation constantly off with air intake from the outside), signalled by the LED in the button switching off and by the symbol in the display disappearing. These operating conditions are obtained by pressing air recirculation button G in sequence. IMPORTANT The engagement of the air recirculation system makes it possible to reach the required heating or cooling conditions faster. It is however not advisable to use recirculation on rainy/cold days as it would considerably increase the possibility of the windows steaming up, especially if the climate control compressor is off. The recirculation is forced off (air is introduced from the outside) when the outside temperature is cold to prevent misting. It is advisable not to use the air recirculation function when the outside temperature is low, because the windows could rapidly steam up. Climate control compressor enablement/off button (F) Press the button to switch the climate control compressor off (if on). The icon on the display will switch off. Press the button when the LED is off to restore automatic system control and use of the compressor. The icon will light up on the display in this case. The system will switch the recirculation off when the compressor is switched off to prevent the windows misting up. Although the system is capable of maintaining the required temperature, the word FULL will disappear from the display. If, on the other hand, it is no longer capable of maintaining the temperature, the letters flash and the word AUTO goes out. IMPORTANT With the compressor off, it is not possible to introduce air cooler than ambient temperature into the passenger compartment. Furthermore, in certain conditions, the windows could mist up rapidly because the air is not dehumidified. The system remembers that the compressor has been switched off, even after the engine has stopped. To restore automatic compressor control, press the √ button again (in this case, the system will only work as a heater) or press the AUTO button. With the compressor switched off, if the outside temperature is higher than the one set, the system is not capable of satisfying this request. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 57 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 58 This is signalled by the target temperature flashing, after which the word AUTO goes out. With the climate control compressor off, the fan speed can be set to zero manually (no bar shown). With the compressor enabled and the engine started, the fan speed may be reduced only to the minimum setting (one bar shown). Button for rapid window demisting/defrosting (D) Press this button and the climate control system will automatically switch on all the functions required for fast windscreen and side window demisting/ defrosting: ❒ switches on climate control compressor when climatic conditions are suitable; ❒ air recirculation off; ❒ maximum air temperature HI in both areas; ❒ sets the fan speed according to the engine coolant temperature to limit the flow of air that is not sufficiently warm to demist the windows; ❒ directs air flow to windscreen and front side windows vents; ❒ heated rear window on. IMPORTANT The rapid demisting/defrosting function for the windows remains on for about 3 minutes from when the engine coolant reaches the appropriate temperature for a rapid demisting of the windows. When this function is active, the LED on the corresponding button and the one on the heated rear window button switch on. The message FULL AUTO goes off on the display. You can only adjust the fan speed and switch the heated rear window off manually when this function is active. To restore the previous operating conditions, simply press button B, air recirculation button G, compressor button F or AUTO button A. Note To guarantee rapid demisting/defrosting, if an additional heater/air conditioner is present (under the front or rear seat on Panorama and Combi versions), if activated, deactivate it using the button F (LED off) located in the control panel F fig. 55. Switching off the system OFF (E) Press button E to switch the climate control system off. The display will go out. The following climate control conditions will be present when the system is off: ❒ display off; ❒ temperature setting not displayed; ❒ air recirculation on, thereby insulating the passenger compartment from the outside (recirculation LED on); ❒ climate control compressor off; ❒ fan off. Press the AUTO button to switch the climate control system back on in full automatic mode. ADDITIONAL HEATER (for versions/markets, where provided) On some versions, an additional heater is also present beneath the driver's seat. The fan for this heater is operated by means of the button F located on the control panel fig. 55. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 55 F0N0500 59 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY INDEPENDENT SUPPLEMENTARY HEATER (for versions/markets, where provided) The vehicle is available, on request, with two different independent heaters: one fully automatic, the other which can be programmed. AUTOMATIC VERSION STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY The additional heater is turned on in automatic mode when the engine is started and the required outside temperature and coolant conditions are present. Deactivation is always automatic. IMPORTANT During periods with low outdoor temperatures when the device cuts in, check that the fuel level is always higher than the reserve level. Otherwise the device could lock and require the assistance of a Fiat Dealership. PROGRAMMABLE VERSION The additional heater operates completely independently of engine operation and allows the following: ❒ heating the passenger compartment with the engine off ❒ defrosting the windows; ❒ heat the engine coolant and then the engine itself prior to starting. The system consists of: ❒ a diesel burner for heating the water with an exhaust silencer for the combustion gases; ❒ a metering pump connected to the reservoir pipes for supplying the burner; ❒ a heat exchanger connected to the engine cooling system pipes; WARNING SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS The heater burns fuel in the same way as the engine, though to a lesser extent. To prevent poisoning and asphyxiation, the supplementary heater must never be turned on, even for short periods, in closed environments such as a garage or workshops without extraction fans for the exhaust gases. INDEX 60 fig. 56 F0N0150 ❒ a control unit connected to the passenger compartment heating/ventilation system to allow automatic operation; ❒ an electronic control unit for controlling and adjusting the built-in burner; ❒ a digital timer A fig. 56 for turning the heater on manually or for programming the time that it comes on. The additional heater (during winter) heats, maintains the temperature of and circulates engine coolant for a set time period in order to ensure optimum engine and passenger compartment conditions at engine start-up. The heater can operate automatically when programmed with a digital timer or manually by pressing the “immediate heating” button on the timer. After heater activation, either programmed or manual, the electronic control unit operates the liquid circulation pump and ignites the burner in accordance with the preset, controlled procedures. The circulation pump output is also controlled by the electronic control unit in order to minimise the initial heating time. When the system operates, the control unit turns on the passenger compartment heater unit fan at the second speed. The thermal power of the boiler is regulated automatically by the electronic control unit depending on the temperature of the engine coolant. IMPORTANT The heater is equipped with a thermal limiter that cuts off combustion in the case of overheating due to insufficient coolant/coolant leaks. In this case, after repairing the fault in the cooling system and/or topping up the fluid, press the program selection button before turning the heater back on. The heater can turn off spontaneously due to misfiring after start-up or because the flame goes out during operation. In this case, carry out the turning off procedure and try to turn the heater back on. If it still does not work, consult a Fiat Dealership. Activation of the heating system When an automatic climate control system is present, the control unit sets the air temperature and distribution when the heater is turned on from the park position. When a manual heater/climate control is present, to obtain maximum heater efficiency, check that the passenger compartment heating/ventilation temperature adjustment knob is in the 'hot air' position. To prioritise passenger compartment pre-heating, set the air distribution knob to the position. To prioritise windscreen defrosting, set the air position. distribution knob to the To obtain both functions, set the air distribution knob to the position. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 61 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING Digital timer fig. 57 Heating turned on immediately fig. 58 1) Heater cycle warning light 2) Display lighting 3) Clock preselection recall number 4) Clock button 5) Hour forward adjustment button 6) Programme selection button 7) Hour back adjustment button 8) Immediate heating activation button 9) Time adjustment/reading warning light To switch the system on manually, press button 8 of the timer: the display and warning light 1 will light up and remain on for the entire time that the system is working. Programmed activation of heating Before programming system activation, it is essential to set the time. Setting the current time ❒ Press button 4: the display and warning light 9 will switch on fig. 59; ❒ Within 10 seconds, press buttons 5 or 7 to select the exact time. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES When the display switches off, the current time is stored. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 62 fig. 57 F0N0151 fig. 58 F0N0152 Holding down the buttons 5 or 7 will move the digits on the clock forwards or backwards faster. IMPORTANT If you wish to recall other preselected times, press button 6 from time to time within 10 seconds. Reading the current time fig. 59 – within 10 seconds, press the buttons 5 or 7 to select the desired switching on time. To read the current time, press button 4: the time will appear on the display for about 10 seconds and warning light 9 will come on at the same time. Programming the switching on time fig. 60 Activation can be programmed with an advance of between 1 minute and 24 hours. Three different activation times may be selected, but only one can be activated for each pre-heating cycle. To program the activation time: ❒ press button 6: the symbol 10 or the time set previously and the number 3 corresponding to the preselection recalled will light up in the display for 10 seconds. IMPORTANT The confirmation that the time has been memorised is given by: ❒ the disappearance of the switching on time; ❒ the presence of the preselection number 3; ❒ the lighting of the display. IMPORTANT When the boiler comes on: ❒ the flame warning light 1 switches on in the display; ❒ the preselection number 3 goes out. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 59 F0N0153 fig. 60 F0N0154 63 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY Deactivation of the programmed switching on time fig. 60 To delete the programmed activation time, press button 6 briefly: the display lighting will go off and the number 3 relating to the preselected time will disappear. Recalling one of the preselected switching on times fig. 61 Press the button 6 as many times as necessary until the number 3 corresponding to the desired programmed activation time appears on the display. After 10 seconds, the time will disappear from the display and remain stored and the number 3 will light up in the display. IMPORTANT The programmed switching on time can be altered or cancelled by following the instructions given previously. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Deactivation of the system, depending on the type of activation (automatic or manual), may be: ❒ automatic, at the end of the preset engagement time (60 minutes with red display lighting); ❒ manual pressing the “immediate heating” button on the timer again (flame button 1). In both cases the heating warning light and the display lighting go off, the passenger compartment heater fan is turned off and the combustion stops. The fluid circulation pump continues to work for around two minutes to dissipate as much heat as possible; the heater can be turned back on during this stage. WARNING The heater burns fuel in the same way as the engine, though to a lesser extent. To prevent poisoning and asphyxiation, the supplementary heater must never be turned on, even for short periods, in closed environments such as a garage or workshops without extraction fans for the exhaust gases. IMPORTANT The parking heater goes off when battery voltage is low to allow the vehicle to be started. INDEX 64 Switching the heating system off fig. 61 F0N0155 IMPORTANT Before turning on the device, ensure that the fuel level is above the reserve. Otherwise the device could lock and require the assistance of a Fiat Dealership. - Always turn off the heater when refuelling and near service stations to avoid the risk of explosion or fire hazards. - Do not park the vehicle on inflammable material such as paper, grass or dry leaves: fire hazard! - The temperature near the heater should not exceed 120°C (e.g. during oven painting in a body shop). The electronic control unit components may be damaged at higher temperatures. - Whilst the heater is operating with the engine switched off, it absorbs energy from the battery; the engine should therefore be left running for a while to make sure that the battery is properly recharged. - To check the coolant level, follow the instructions in the "Vehicle maintenance" chapter, "Engine coolant system fluid" paragraph. The water in the heating circuit must contain a minimum percentage of 10% antifreeze. - For maintenance and repairs, consult only a Fiat Dealership and use only original parts. MAINTENANCE Have the additional heater checked regularly at a Fiat Dealership (and always at the start of every winter). This will guarantee safe and economic operation of the heater as well as a long duration. ADDITIONAL REAR HEATING (Panorama and Combi) (for versions/markets, where provided) The Panorama and Combi versions are equipped with a main heating system plus an additional system (available on request) with controls in the roof lining above the second row of seats fig. 62. In order to work the system must be enabled through the button F fig. 63 on the control panel. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 62 F0N0233 65 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY Turn the knob D to the maximum cold position (knob at blue sector); air at ambient temperature will come out of the rear footwell vents (located under the seats in the 2nd and 3rd row for Panorama versions and the grille on the left wheel arch side for Combi versions); Turn the knob D to the maximum heating position (knob at red sector);warm air will emerge (with the engine warmed up), from the rear footwell outlets (located under the seats in the 2nd and 3rd row for Panorama versions and the grille on the left wheel arch side for Combi versions). ADDITIONAL REAR CLIMATE CONTROL (Panorama and Combi) (for versions/markets, where provided) The Panorama and Combi versions are equipped with a main heating/air conditioning system plus an additional system (available on request) with controls SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 66 fig. 63 F0N0500 in the roof lining above the second row of seats fig. 62. Button F fig. 63 in the control panel must be enabled for operation; the air conditioning only works if the main air conditioner is on. ❒ When the knob D is placed in the fully cold position (control in blue sector) cold air comes out the vents in the ceiling. ❒ Turn the knob D to the maximum heating position (knob at red sector);warm air will emerge (with the engine warmed up), from the rear footwell outlets (located under the seats in the 2nd and 3rd row for Panorama versions and the grille on the left wheel arch side for Combi versions). ❒ If the selector knob D is placed in the intermediate positions, the air will be distributed between the vents in the ceiling and the rear footwell vents, varying the temperature. IMPORTANT If the compressor on the main air conditioner control is turned on (operation of button E), even if the additional air conditioner fan is in position 0, the 1st speed will automatically be activated to prevent ice formation, with possible damage to the component. EXTERNAL LIGHTS If the daytime running lights are deactivated, no light comes on when the ring nut is turned to O. The left lever includes the controls for the external lights. The external lights can only be switched on when the ignition key is in the ON position. LIGHTS OFF Ring nut turned to position O fig. 64. DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL) (for versions/markets, where provided) With the ignition key turned to MAR-ON and the ring nut turned to position O fig. 64 the daytime running lights are automatically activated; the other lights and interior lighting remain off. The automatic operation of the daytime running lights can be activated/deactivated via the display menu (see "Multifunction Display" in this chapter). KNOW YOUR VEHICLE WARNING The daytime running lights are an alternative to the dipped beam headlights for driving during the daytime in countries where it is compulsory to have lights on during the day, and they are also permitted in those countries where this not obligatory. Daytime running lights cannot replace dipped beam headlights when driving at night or through tunnels.The use of daytime running lights is governed by the highway code of the country in which you are driving. Comply with legal requirements. SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 64 F0N0501 67 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS/SIDE LIGHTS MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS With the ignition key turned to MAR-ON, turn the ring nut to fig. 65. If dipped beams are activated, the daytime running lights go out and the side lights and dipped beam headlights come on. The warning light on the instrument panel switches on. When the ignition key is turned to STOP or removed and the ring nut is turned from O to , all the side lights and number plate lights come on. The warning light will come on in the instrument panel. , pull the stalk When the ring nut is in position towards the steering wheel (2nd unstable position) fig. 66. The warning light on the instrument panel switches on. To turn the main beams off, pull again the lever towards the steering wheel (dipped beams will turn on again). IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 68 fig. 65 F0N0502 fig. 66 F0N0503 FLASHING DIRECTION INDICATORS Pull the lever towards the steering wheel (1st unstable position) fig. 67 regardless of the position of switches on on the ring nut. The warning light the instrument panel. Place the lever in the (stable) position fig. 68: ❒ up (position 1): activates the right direction indicator; ❒ down (position 2): activates the left direction indicator. Warning light F or D should flash in the instrument panel. Direction indicators switch off automatically when the vehicle is back in a straight line. PARKING LIGHTS These lights can only be turned on with ignition key in STOP position or removed, by moving the left stalk ring nut first to position O and then to position or . The warning light on the instrument panel switches on. Lane change function If you wish to signal a lane change, put the left stalk in the unstable position for less than half a second. The direction indicator on the side selected will flash five times and then switch off automatically. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 67 F0N0504 fig. 68 F0N0505 69 "FOLLOW ME HOME" DEVICE KNOW YOUR VEHICLE This device allows the illumination of the space in front of the vehicle for a preset time. Activation SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES With the ignition key on OFF or removed, pull the stalk towards the steering wheel fig. 69 within 2 minutes from when the engine is turned off. At each single movement of the stalk, the lights will remain on for an extra 30 seconds up to a maximum of 210 seconds; then the lights are switched off automatically. The warning light on the instrument panel will light up and the corresponding message will appear in the display (see “Warning lights and messages”) for as long as the function is activated. IN AN EMERGENCY The light comes on when the stalk is first moved and stays on until the function is automatically deactivated. Each movement of the stalk increases only the amount of time the lights stay on. Deactivation Keep the stalk pulled towards the steering wheel for more than 2 seconds. AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHT SENSOR (dusk sensor) (for versions/markets, where provided) It detects variations in brightness outside the vehicle depending on the light sensitivity setting: the greater the sensitivity, the less outside light needed to activate the external lights being turned on. The sensitivity of the dusk sensor is adjusted by means of the "Setup menu" of the display. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 70 fig. 69 F0N0506 fig. 70 F0N0507 Activation WINDOW CLEANING Turn the ring nut to position fig. 70: this turns the side lights and the dipped beam headlights on simultaneously and automatically depending on the exterior brightness conditions. Deactivation The main beam headlights will go out followed by the side lights after approximately 10 seconds, when the sensor is deactivated. The sensor is not capable of detecting the presence of fog therefore, in these circumstances, the lights have to be turned on manually. The right stalk fig. 71 controls windscreen wiper/washer operation. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 71 F0N0038 71 WINDSCREEN WASHER/WIPER KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS They can be operated only with the ignition key turned to MAR-ON. The right stalk can be moved to five different positions: A windscreen wiper off. B intermittent operation. With the lever in position B, turn control F to select one of four different speeds for the intermittent operation mode: very slow intermittent operation. slow intermittent operation. -- - - medium intermittent operation - - - - fast intermittent operation. C continuous slow operation. D continuous fast operation E temporary fast operation (unstable position). Temporary fast operation position E is limited to the time that the lever is manually held in this position. The lever returns to position A when it is released, automatically stopping the windscreen wipers. Never use the windscreen wipers to remove layers of snow or ice from the windscreen. In such conditions, the windscreen wipers may be subjected to excessive stress and the overload cut-out, which prevents operation for a few seconds, may intervene. If rear window wiper operation is not restored, contact a Fiat Dealership. “Smart washing” function Pull the stalk towards the steering wheel (unstable position) to operate the windscreen washer fig. 72. Keeping the stalk pulled for more than half a second, with just one movement it is possible to operate the washer jet and the wiper at the same time. The wiper stops working three strokes after the stalk is released. IMPORTANT Replace the wiper blades as specified in the “Maintenance and care” section. INDEX 72 fig. 72 F0N0039 A further stroke after approximately 5 seconds completes the wiping cycle. RAIN SENSOR (for versions/markets, where provided) The rain sensor is located behind the rear-view mirror in contact with the windscreen and has the purpose of automatically adjusting the frequency of the windscreen wiper strokes depending on the intensity of the rain during intermittent operation. IMPORTANT Keep the glass in the sensor area clean. Activation fig. 71 Move the right lever down by one click (position B). The activation of the sensor is signalled by a "stroke" to show that the command has been acquired. Turn the ring nut F to increase the rain sensor sensitivity. The increasing of the rain sensor sensitivity is also signalled by a stroke of the wipers. If the windscreen washer is used with the rain sensor activated, the normal washing cycle is performed, after which the rain sensor resumes its normal automatic operation. Deactivation fig. 71 Move the lever from position B or turn the ignition key to OFF. The next time the vehicle is started (ignition key in ON position), the sensor is not reactivated even if the lever is still in position B. To activate the sensor, move the lever to position A or C and then back to position B or turn the ring nut for adjusting the sensitivity. Rain sensor activation will be indicated by at least one wiper “stroke” even if the windscreen is dry. The rain sensor is capable of recognising the difference between day and night and making the necessary adjustments automatically. WARNING Streaks of water may cause unnecessary blade movements. HEADLIGHT WASHERS (for versions/markets, where provided) Headlight washers are “retractable”, i.e. they are located inside the front bumpers and they are activated when (with dipped beams on) the windscreen washer is operated. IMPORTANT Check the correct condition and cleanliness of nozzles at regular intervals. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 73 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY CRUISE CONTROL (for versions/markets, where provided) This is an electronic driving aid that allows you to drive at a speed of above 30 km/h on long and straight dry roads with few driving changes (e.g. motorways) at a preset speed without having to press the accelerator pedal. It is therefore not recommended to use this device on extra-urban roads with traffic. Do not use it in town. Switching the device on Turn the ring nut A to the ON position. The Cruise Control cannot be engaged in 1st or reverse gear. It is advisable to engage it in 4th or higher gears. When travelling downhill with the device engaged, the vehicle speed may slightly exceed the memorised one. Storing vehicle speed Proceed as follows: ❒ turn ring nut A fig. 73 to ON and press the accelerator pedal so that the vehicle reaches the desired speed; ❒ move the stalk upwards (+) for at least one second, then release it: the vehicle speed is memorised and you can therefore release the accelerator pedal. If necessary (when overtaking for instance) acceleration is possible by simply pressing the accelerator pedal: releasing the accelerator pedal, the car will return to the speed memorised previously. Restoring the set speed If the device has been deactivated, for example by depressing the brake or clutch pedal, the set speed can be restored as follows: ❒ accelerate progressively until a speed close to that stored is reached; ❒ engage the gear selected at the time that the speed was stored; ❒ press button B fig. 73. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 74 When the device is activated the warning light comes on together with the relevant message on the instrument panel. fig. 73 F0N0508 Increasing the stored speed Deactivating the device This can be carried out in two ways: ❒ by pressing the accelerator and storing the new speed reached or ❒ by moving the stalk upwards (+). Each movement of the stalk corresponds to an increase in speed of about 1 km/h, while keeping the stalk held upwards will continuously increase the speed. The device can be deactivated by the driver in the following ways: ❒ by turning ring nut A to the OFF position ❒ by stopping the engine Decreasing the stored speed This can be carried out in two ways: ❒ by switching off the device and then storing the new speed; or ❒ by moving the stalk downwards (-) until the new speed, which will be stored automatically, is reached. Each movement of the lever corresponds to a reduction in speed of about 1 km/h, while keeping the stalk held downwards will decrease the speed continuously. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY Deactivating the function The device can be deactivated by the driver in the following ways: ❒ by turning ring nut A to the OFF position ❒ by stopping the engine ❒ by pressing the brake pedal or operating the handbrake ❒ by pressing the clutch pedal ❒ requesting a gear shift with an automatic transmission in sequential mode ❒ with the vehicle speed below the set limit ❒ by pressing the accelerator pedal; in this case the system is not actually turned off but the acceleration request takes priority; the cruise control remains activated, without the need to press the RES button to restore the previous conditions once the acceleration is over. The device is automatically switched off in the following cases: ❒ if the ABS or ESP systems cut in; ❒ in the event of system failure. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 75 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES WARNING When travelling with the device active, never move the gear lever to neutral. WARNING If the device is faulty, turn ring nut A to OFF, check the condition of the fuse and contact a Fiat Dealership. ROOF LIGHTS FRONT ROOF LIGHT WITH SPOT LIGHTS Switch A fig. 74 switches the roof lights on/off. With the switch A in the middle position, the lights C and D go on/off when front doors are opened/ closed. With switch A pressed to the left, the lights C and D are always off. With switch A pressed to the right, the lights C and D are always on. Lights switch on/off progressively. The switch B is a spot light; when the ceiling light is off, it switches the following on individually: ❒ light C if pressed on the left side; ❒ light D if pressed on the right side. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 76 fig. 74 F0N0041 IMPORTANT Before getting out of the vehicle, make sure that both switches are in the middle position; when the doors are closed, the lights switch off preventing the battery from running flat. In any case, if the switch is left in the on position, the roof light switches off automatically 15 minutes after the engine is stopped. Roof light timing On certain versions, to facilitate getting in/out of the vehicle at night or in poorly-lit areas, 2 timed modes have been provided. TIMING WHEN GETTING INTO THE VEHICLE The roof lights switch on as follows: ❒ for around 10 seconds when the front doors are unlocked; ❒ for about 3 minutes when one of the side doors is opened; ❒ for about 10 seconds when the doors are closed. The timed period is interrupted when the ignition is turned to MAR-ON. TIMING WHEN GETTING OUT OF THE VEHICLE After removing the key from the ignition, the roof lights switch on as follows: ❒ within 2 minutes of the engine being switched off for a period of around 10 seconds; ❒ when one of the side doors is opened for a period of around 3 minutes; ❒ when one of the doors is closed for a period of about 10 seconds. The timed period stops automatically when the doors are locked. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY LOAD COMPARTMENT REAR ROOF LIGHT This is located above the rear door. Press the cover at the point shown in fig. 75 to switch it on. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 75 F0N0042 77 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES LOAD COMPARTMENT SIDE ROOF LIGHT (for versions/markets, where provided) CONTROLS Press the cover at the point shown in fig. 76 to switch it on. HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS REMOVABLE ROOF LIGHT (for versions/markets, where provided) They are turned on by pressing switch A fig. 78, regardless of the position of the ignition key. It is used as both a fixed light and a portable electric torch. When the removable light is secured to its fixed support fig. 77, the electric torch battery is automatically recharged. With the vehicle stationary and the ignition key either turned to STOP or removed, the roof light is recharged for a maximum of 15 minutes. IN AN EMERGENCY fig. 77 F0N0220 fig. 78 F0N0044 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 78 fig. 76 F0N0219 Warning lights and are lit up in the instrument panel when this device is activated. Press switch A again to turn the lights off. IMPORTANT The use of hazard warning lights is governed by the highway code of the country you are in. Comply with legal requirements. Emergency braking (for versions/markets where provided) FOG LIGHTS (for versions/markets, where provided) To turn the lights on, press the button with the side lights on fig. 79. The warning light on the panel switches on. Press the button again to turn the lights off. The use of fog lights is governed by the Highway Code of the country you are in. Comply with legal requirements. In the event of emergency braking the hazard warning lights come on automatically, as do the and warning lights in the panel. The function switches off automatically when the nature of the braking changes. This function complies with the relevant legislation currently in force. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 79 F0N0045 79 REAR FOG LIGHT KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES These lights come on, with the dipped headlights on or with the side lights and fog lights on (for versions/markets, where provided) by pressing the button fig. 80. The warning light on the panel switches on. Press the button again to turn the lights off, or turn off the dipped beams and/or the front fog lights (where provided). The use of rear fog lamps is governed by the Highway Code of the country you are in. Comply with legal requirements. HEATED REAR WINDOW (for versions/markets, where provided) Press button A fig. 81 to activate. The device will be switched off automatically after approximately 20 minutes. PARKING LIGHTS These lights can only be turned on with ignition key in STOP position or removed, by moving the left stalk ring nut first to position O and then to position or . The warning light will come on in the instrument panel. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 80 fig. 80 F0N0046 fig. 81 F0N0043 BATTERY DISCONNECTION FUNCTION (DISCONNECTOR) (for versions/markets, where provided) The battery disconnection function is enabled with the ignition key in the BATT position, as illustrated on the dedicated plate located in the area illustrated in fig. 82. fig. 82 F0N0811 To turn the ignition key to BATT position, press button A (red) fig. 83. The battery will be disconnected, by interrupting the earth lead, about 45 seconds after the key is turned to the BATT position. This 45 second period is necessary to: ❒ allow the driver to get out of the vehicle and lock the doors using the remote control; ❒ guarantee that all the vehicle electrical systems have been deactivated. With the battery disconnected, access to the vehicle will only be possible by unlocking the driver's door using the mechanical lock. To restore the battery connection, insert the ignition key and turn it to MAR-ON; the vehicle can be started normally at this point. If the battery is disconnected, it may be necessary to set certain electrical devices again (e.g. clock, date, etc.). KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 83 F0N0810 81 CENTRAL LOCKING KNOW YOUR VEHICLE To lock all doors at the same time, press button A fig. 84, located on the centre console control panel, regardless of the position of the ignition key. SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY fig. 84 F0N0047 fig. 85 F0N0132 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 82 Press button B fig. 84 to release the doors. The electric window panel features a button D fig. 85 which independently unlocks/locks the load compartment. ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY AND FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH The vehicle is fitted with a safety switch that, in the event of a crash, comes into operation by cutting off the fuel supply and turning off the engine as a consequence. When the inertia switch cuts in, this cuts off the fuel supply and also activates the hazard warning lights, side lights and roof lights while releasing all the doors and displaying a message; they are deactivated by pressing button A. An additional safety switch is also present that is activated in the event of impact to cut off the electrical supply. In this way, fuel is prevented from escaping if the pipes are broken to stop the formation of sparks or electrical discharges following damage to the vehicle electrical components. WARNING If, after a crash, you smell fuel or see leaks from the fuel system, do not reset the switches to avoid fire risk. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY Reactivating the fuel cut-off switch Press button A to reactivate the fuel cut-off switchfig. 86. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY IMPORTANT After an accident, remember to remove the key from the ignition device to avoid draining the battery. If no fuel leaks or damage to vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) are detected after the impact and the vehicle is able to set off again, reactivate the automatic fuel cut off and electrical supply switches (for versions/markets where provided) following the procedure described below. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 86 F0N0048 83 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING Reactivating the electrical supply cut-off switch (School bus/Minibus) The switch is located on the positive battery terminal fig. 87. To reactivate the electrical supply switch, proceed as follows: ❒ press button A to reset the fuel cut-off switch; ❒ press button B to reset the electrical supply switch. WARNING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES Before reactivating the electrical supply switch, carefully check for fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle's electrical devices (e.g. headlights). IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 84 fig. 87 F0N0127 WARNING Before reactivating the fuel cut-off switch, carefully check for fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle's electrical devices (e.g. headlights). IMPORTANT On versions other than School bus/Minibus, button B is replaced by a dedicated fuse; to replace it contact a Fiat Dealership INTERIOR FITTINGS To open the glove compartment, use the opening handle. The compartment is big enough to hold a laptop computer. UPPER STORAGE COMPARTMENT REFRIGERATED COMPARTMENT (for versions/markets, where provided) To use, lift the flap as shown in fig. 88. If air conditioned, the compartment, equipped with a bottle holder, may be cooled/heated by means of an outlet connected to the climate control system. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING GLOVE COMPARTMENT To open the glove compartment, operate the opening handle A fig. 89. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES GLOVE COMPARTMENT WITH LOCK Turn the key clockwise/anticlockwise to lock/unlock the lock fig. 90. fig. 89 F0N0050 IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 88 F0N0049 fig. 90 F0N0051 85 GLOVE COMPARTMENT KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY Compartment A fig. 91 is located in the middle of the dashboard. Compartment B fig. 92 is located on the right of the dashboard above the glove compartment. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 86 fig. 91 F0N0511 fig. 92 F0N0053 DOOR POCKETS There are oddment/document pockets located in each of the door panels fig. 94. Certain outfits are equipped with a protective grille on the window of the partition inside the load compartment. COMPARTMENT BENEATH PASSENGER SIDE FRONT SEAT KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY Proceed as follows to use the compartment: ❒ Open the flap A fig. 95 and remove it as illustrated; ❒ turn the lock knob B anticlockwise and remove it to allow the removal of the compartment. STARTING AND DRIVING REAR PARTITION WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES The vehicle may be equipped with a solid rear partition or with a sliding glass partition. To open/close the sliding glass partition use the knob A fig. 96. fig. 95 F0N0134 IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 94 F0N0128 fig. 96 F0N0218 87 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE CUP HOLDER - CAN HOLDER CIGAR LIGHTER The cup/can holder is located in the centre of the dashboard fig. 97. It is located in the centre of the dashboard fig. 98. Press button on the cigar lighter to switch it on when the ignition key is turned to MAR-ON. After about 15 seconds the button will return to its original position automatically and the cigar lighter is ready for use. SAFETY IMPORTANT Always check that the cigar lighter is switched off. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES The cigar lighter gets very hot. Handle it carefully and make sure that children don't touch it: risk of fire and/or burning. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 88 fig. 97 F0N0054 fig. 98 F0N0055 ASHTRAY The ashtray is a removable plastic container fig. 99 that can be fitted in the cup/can holders in the centre of the dashboard. IMPORTANT Do not use the ashtray as a waste paper basket at the same time: fire hazard. POWER SOCKET (for versions/markets, where provided) The cigar lighter and the power socket are located in the centre console. To use it, open cover A fig. 101. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY SUN VISORS STARTING AND DRIVING These are located at the sides of the rear-view mirror fig. 100. They may be positioned at the front and at the side. A vanity mirror is fitted on the passenger side sun visor on all versions. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES fig. 100 F0N0056 IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 99 F0N0146 fig. 101 F0N0057 89 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES DESK/BOOK REST (for versions/markets, where provided) SHELF ABOVE THE CAB (for versions/markets, where provided) There is a desk A fig. 102 in the centre of the dashboard above the radio compartment; on some versions this desk can be used as a book rest by raising the back section and resting it on the dashboard as illustrated in the figure. On versions with passenger side air bags, the desk is fixed. This is located above the driver's cab fig. 103 and is designed to store light objects. Maximum permitted load: – localised : 10 kg – distributed over the entire surface of the shelf: 20 kg WARNING Do not use the desk in vertical position with the vehicle in motion. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 90 fig. 102 F0N0058 fig. 103 F0N0190 CAB GLOVE COMPARTMENT (CAPUCINE) (for versions/markets, where provided) This is fitted above the sun visors fig. 104 and is designed for quick and easy storage of light objects (e.g. documents, road maps etc.). Portable navigators to be fitted in the housing in fig. 106 have a mechanical release device activated by pressing the two side buttons on the stem. Failure to operate the release may damage the navigator housing. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY FLAP ON BENCH (for versions/markets, where provided) To use, pull tab A fig. 105 and lower the flap. The flap is equipped with two cup holders and a support surface with a paper holder clip. STARTING AND DRIVING PORTABLE NAVIGATOR SOCKET (for versions/markets, where provided) WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES It is located in the area of the dashboard as illustrated in fig. 106 for connecting the portable navigator. fig. 105 F0N0149 IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 104 F0N0191 fig. 106 F0N0512 91 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY CAMERA AND DISPLAY FOR REAR VISIBILITY (for versions/markets, where provided) The parking camera system fig. 107 offers the driver a view of the situation behind the vehicle by means of a display A fig. 108 in the passenger compartment. STARTING AND DRIVING The system consists of a camera installed in a plastic casing on the rear roof crossmember, which also includes a third brake light and a display in a plastic casing housed in the upper glove compartment console area. The display has buttons (On/Off, brightness, backlight); to use them, operate the release button and move to the open position. The rear view display is adjusted in mirror mode. When not in use, it must be closed in the upper oddments compartment console area. ACTIVATION WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY fig. 107 F0N0217 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE GENERAL WARNINGS Area of visibility TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS The area of visibility may vary according to the vehicle position (full load condition included), according to the vehicle specification and according to weather conditions (high brightness, rain, snow and fog). Visibility may be reduced during poor lighting or full load conditions. INDEX 92 The system is activated with the ignition on and reverse engaged or by means of a dedicated button. If the vehicle is in motion, e.g. during a reversing manoeuvre, the system will operate up to a speed of approximately 15 km/h and go off when a speed of approximately 18 km/h is exceeded. When reverse is deactivated, the image will appear on the display for a further 5 seconds. fig. 108 F0N0214 The maximum cover area of the camera is around 3 m in length and about 5.5 m in width fig. 109. Important usage information To clean the camera, it is advisable to use a non-abrasive cloth when the protective glass is dirty or iced over (on the outside). It is absolutely necessary to avoid using any tool for cleaning as this could scratch the glass. It is also advisable to use a dry non-abrasive cloth when cleaning the display. The dust that settles on the display may be removed with special brushes. Avoid using any detergent for cleaning. The display glass could break in the event of impact. In this case, do not touch the liquid crystal that emerges from the display. If this occurs, quickly wash the contaminated parts with soap and water. USER INTERFACE The display user interface consists of fig. 110: ❒ Brightness adjustment: 2 buttons; ❒ Backlight adjustment: 2 buttons; ❒ ON/OFF button: this allows images from the camera to be seen even with reverse gear not engaged. The system makes it possible to return to the initial configuration, keeping the ON/OFF button pressed for approximately 3 seconds with the system deactivated. In this case, the ON/OFF key flashes twice to confirm the operation. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 109 F0N0215 fig. 110 F0N0216 93 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 94 MESSAGES ON THE SCREEN TACHOGRAPH Messages are shown on the display under the following conditions: ❒ An alert message is displayed during the 5 seconds following reverse engagement. ❒ When a speed of approximately 18 km/h is exceeded and only the activation button is ON, the image disappears and a message reporting that the system has gone into stand-by mode is displayed for approximately 5 seconds. ❒ When a speed of approximately 18 km/h is exceeded and reverse gear is engaged, the image disappears and an alert message is displayed that remains until the speed drops to approximately 15 km/h. In this case, the image is displayed again. The system makes it possible to change the language in which the text messages are displayed. For this selection, with the system deactivated, press the ON/OFF button and any other button simultaneously and then select the language by scrolling through the menu using the ON/OFF button. When the desired language is reached, wait for about 3 seconds so that it is stored. For tachograph operation and use, consult the owner handbook supplied by the device manufacturer. The tachograph must be installed on the vehicle when the vehicle weight (with or without trailer) exceeds 3.5 tons. IMPORTANT Anyone making changes to the monitoring device or signal transmission system that affects recording by the monitoring instrument, particularly if this is done for purposes of fraud, may be in breach of criminal or administrative state regulations. IMPORTANT If a tachograph is fitted, if the vehicle is parked for more than 5 days, it is advisable to disconnect the negative battery terminal to maintain its charge. IMPORTANT Do not use abrasive detergents or solvents to clean the device. To clean the outside of the device, use a damp cloth or special products for the care of synthetic materials. The tachograph is installed and sealed by authorised personnel: do not try and access the device or the supply and recording leads in any way. It is the responsibility of the owner of the vehicle on which the tachograph is installed to check the device regularly. The check must be carried out at least every two years and a test must be carried out to ensure that it is working properly. Ensure that the data label is renewed after every check and that the label contains the specified data. SPEED BLOCK (for versions/markets, where provided) The vehicle is equipped with a function that limits the speed that can be set, when requested by the user, to one of 4 preset values: 90, 100, 110 or 130 km/h. This function must be activated/deactivated through a Fiat Dealership. Following the operation, a sticker will be applied to the windscreen showing the maximum speed setting. WARNING The speedometer could indicate a higher maximum speed than the effective one, set by the Dealership, in accordance with the regulations in force. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 95 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SELF-LEVELLING AIR SUSPENSION Manual adjustment is only available for a limited number of times with the engine switched off. GENERAL INFORMATION The system only acts on the rear wheels. The system maintains the rear ride setting for the vehicle constant in any loading condition, while ensuring a greater driving comfort. In addition, the system allows the height of the vehicle to be adjusted with the vehicle stationary, by selecting from 7 different positions to facilitate access to the rear compartment. HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT There are 7 pre-defined levels for the free height from the ground: from “ride -3” to “ride 0” till “ride +3”. The multifunction display, located in the middle of the instrument panel, can show the ride position. Before manually adjusting with doors open, make sure there is enough space around the vehicle for this kind of operation. Pressing button A, for less than 1 second, selects the next level up. Keeping button A pressed, for more than 1 second, selects the maximum level directly: “ride +3”. Pressing button B, for less than 1 second, selects the next level down. Keeping button B pressed, for more than 1 second, selects the minimum level directly: “ride -3”. During the adjustment the LED located on the button (A or B) corresponding to the direction of travel, flashes. Automatic adjustment SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS When moving, the system automatically shows that the vehicle is in 'ride setting 0' and keeps it constant. During the adjustment the LED located on the button (A or B fig. 111) corresponding to the direction of travel, flashes. Manual adjustment INDEX 96 With the vehicle stationary and the engine on or off, the desired height level can be set. fig. 111 F0N0677 If, after selecting a button, the LED remains lit up (for about 5 seconds) rather than flashing, this means that the adjustment is temporarily unavailable. Possible causes may be as follows: – insufficient air reserve: the function is restored by starting the engine; – the system has reached a threshold working temperature: wait a few minutes to let it cool down before operating the buttons again. The level selected with the vehicle stationary is maintained up to a speed of about 20 km/h; when this speed is exceeded, the system will automatically restore the normal level: “ride 0”. DOORS DOOR CENTRAL LOCKING/UNLOCKING KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Locking from the outside With the doors shut, press button on the remote control fig. 112 - fig. 113or insert the metal insert A in the lock of the door on the driver's side and turn it clockwise. The doors will only be locked if all doors are shut. To extract the metal insert, press button B. If one or more of the doors is open after the button on the remote control is pressed, the direction indicators and the LED in the button fig. 115 will flash quickly for about 3 seconds. Buttons A and B fig. 115 are disabled with the function active. SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 112 F0N0800 97 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Pressing button on the remote control twice in quick succession activates the dead lock device (see "Dead lock"). Door unlocking from the outside SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES Door locking/unlocking from the inside Press the button A fig. 115 to lock the doors, press button B to unlock the doors. The locking/unlocking actions take place centrally (front and rear). Briefly press button fig. 112 or fig. 113, according to the version, to remotely unlock the front doors, switch on the roof lights in a timed manner and flash the direction indicators. Turn the key anticlockwise in the driver's door fig. 114 to unlock all the doors. With the battery disconnected, access to the vehicle will only be possible by unlocking the driver's door using the mechanical lock. IN AN EMERGENCY fig. 114 F0N0059 fig. 115 F0N0047 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 98 fig. 113 F0N0801 When the doors are locked, the LED in the button A is on and pressing button B brings about central unlocking of all the doors and turns off the warning light. When the doors are unlocked, the LED is off and pressing the button brings about central locking of all the doors. The doors will be locked only if all the doors are properly shut. Following the locking of the doors using: ❒ remote control ❒ door pawl they cannot be unlocked using the button A fig. 115 in the dashboard. IMPORTANT With the central locking on, pulling the opening lever for one of the front doors causes the central locking to be switched off. Individual doors can be unlocked by pulling the opening handle of one of the rear doors. In the absence of electrical power supply (blown fuse, battery disconnected, etc.) it is still possible to lock the doors manually. After exceeding 20 km/h, all the doors will be locked automatically if the setup menu function has been selected (see “Multifunction display” paragraph in this section). LOAD COMPARTMENT BUTTON Lock activation is indicated by the LED in the button. The LED comes on in the following cases: ❒ after each door lock command generated by the button D fig. 116 or by button in the dashboard; ❒ when the instrument panel is activated; ❒ upon opening of one of the front doors; ❒ when the door is locked at 20 km/h (if activated from the menu). The lock is turned off when one of the load compartment doors is opened or on a door release request (load compartment or centralised) or an unlocking request from the remote control/door catch. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 116 F0N0132 99 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 100 DEAD LOCK (for versions/markets, where provided) This safety device inhibits the operation of: ❒ interior handles buttons A-B fig. 115 for locking unlocking thereby preventing the opening of the doors from inside the passenger compartment if there has been a break in attempt (e.g. a window has been broken). The dead lock device therefore offers the best possible protection against break-in attempts. We recommend engaging it whenever the vehicle is parked and left unattended. WARNING Once the dead lock system is engaged it is impossible to open the doors from inside the vehicle.Therefore, before engaging the system check that there is no one left inside. If the remote control battery is flat, the system can be disengaged only by inserting the key in either of the door locks as described previously: in this case the device remains active only for the rear doors. Device activation The dead lock device is automatically activated on every door with two short presses on the button on the key with remote control fig. 112. Device activation is indicated by 3 flashes of the direction indicators and a flash of the LED on button A fig. 115 on the dashboard. If one or more of the doors is not perfectly shut, the dead lock device will not be activated, thus preventing a person getting into the vehicle through the open door and, on shutting, it, remaining stuck inside the passenger compartment. Device deactivation The system is disabled automatically on every door in the following cases: ❒ if the mechanical key is turned to the opening position in the driver's door; ❒ by unlocking the doors using the remote control; ❒ by turning the ignition key to the MAR-ON position. SLIDING SIDE DOOR WARNING Before leaving the vehicle parked with sliding doors open, always check that the latch is engaged. WARNING Do not move the vehicle with side doors open. To open the sliding side door, lift handle A fig. 117 and slide the door open. The sliding side door is equipped with a stop that prevents it sliding beyond the end of its travel when opening. To close, operate the exterior handle A (or the corresponding interior handle) and push to close. In any case, make sure that the door is correctly hooked to the device which keeps the door fully open. SLIDING SIDE WINDOW (for versions/markets, where provided) To open, keep the two handles B fig. 118 pressed toward one another and slide the window. When the two handles are released, the sliding glass may stop in intermediate positions. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 117 F0N0061 fig. 118 F0N0240 101 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY MOVING FOOTBOARD (for versions/markets, where provided) REAR DOOR WITH TWO WINGS When the side door of the passenger compartment or luggage compartment is opened, a footboard fig. 119 emerges from the lower part of the floorpan to make it easier to get on board the vehicle. Manual opening of the first swing door from the outside Turn the key anticlockwise fig. 114 or press the button on the remote control and turn handle A fig. 120 in the direction of the arrow. WARNING STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES Before setting off after parking or before moving the vehicle in any way, ensure that the footboard is fully stowed away. As the movement of the platform is linked to that of the sliding side door, the warning light in the instrument panel comes on if it is not fully retracted in the same way as when the rear doors are not shut. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 102 fig. 119 F0N0176 fig. 120 F0N0129 Manual opening of the first swing door from the inside (for versions/markets, where provided) Pull handle B fig. 121 in the direction of the arrow. Electrical closure from inside Close the two rear swing doors (first the left, then the right) and press button D fig. 123 located on the window control panel. Manual closure of the first swing door from the outside KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY Turn the key clockwise or press the button on the key with remote control. Close the left door first, followed by the right door. STARTING AND DRIVING Manual opening of the second swing door Pull handle C fig. 122 in the direction of the arrow. The rear swing doors are equipped with a spring loaded system that stops them at an angle of about 90 degrees during opening. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES fig. 122 F0N0131 IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 121 F0N0130 fig. 123 F0N0132 103 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING The opening angle of the two doors may be increased for more convenient loading and unloading. To carry out this operation, press button A fig. 124; the doors can then be opened by about 180 degrees. WARNING This spring loaded system has activation forces that were designed for optimum comfort. Accidental knocks or a strong gust of wind may release the springs and close the doors spontaneously. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY WARNING With the doors opened to 180 degrees, no locking system is effective. Do not use this opening with the vehicle parked on a gradient or when it is windy. ELECTRIC WINDOWS ELECTRIC Switches fig. 125 on the inner armrest of the driver's door control the following with the ignition key in MAR-ON position: A: to open/close the left front window; B: right front window opening/closing. Continuous automatic operation All versions are equipped with automatic raising and lowering of the front, driver's side window. Keep one of the buttons held down for longer than half a second to activate automatic continuous window operation. The window will stop when it is fully opened or closed, or when the button is pressed again. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 104 fig. 124 F0N0188 fig. 125 F0N0062 IMPORTANT With the ignition key in the STOP position or extracted, the electric windows remain activated for about 3 minutes and are deactivated immediately when one of the doors is opened. WARNING Improper use of the electric windows can be dangerous. Before and during operation, always check that no-one is exposed to the risk of being injured either directly by the moving window or through objects getting caught or by being hit.When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the ignition to avoid the risk of injury to anyone remaining in the car due to accidental operation of the electric windows. BONNET KNOW YOUR VEHICLE OPENING Proceed as follows: ❒ open the driver's door to gain access to the bonnet release; ❒ pull the lever fig. 126 in the direction indicated by the arrow; ❒ pull lever A fig. 127 as shown in the figure; ❒ lift the bonnet and, at the same time, release the bonnet stay fig. 128 from its locking device D, then insert the end fig. 129 of the bonnet stay into the housing E. IMPORTANT Before opening the bonnet, check that the windscreen wiper arms are not lifted from the windscreen. Front passenger side door A dedicated switch for operating the window is located on the inner armrest of the passenger side front door. SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 126 F0N0063 105 CLOSING KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING Proceed as follows: ❒ hold the bonnet up with one hand and with the other remove the stay C fig. 129 from the housing E and fit it back in its locking device D fig. 128; ❒ lower the bonnet to approximately 20 centimetres from the engine compartment and let it drop. Make sure that the bonnet is completely closed and not only fastened by the safety catch by trying to open it. If it is not perfectly closed, do not try to press the bonnet lid down but open it and repeat the procedure. IMPORTANT Always check that the bonnet is closed correctly to avoid it opening while the car is travelling. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY fig. 128 F0N0065 fig. 129 F0N0066 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 106 fig. 127 F0N0323 WARNING The bonnet must always be perfectly closed while travelling for safety reasons. Therefore, always check that the hood has been correctly closed and that the lock has been engaged. If you notice when driving that the hood has not been properly locked, stop immediately and close the hood correctly. WARNING The bonnet may drop suddenly if the supporting rod is not positioned correctly. WARNING ROOF RACK/SKI RACK To fit the roof/ski rack, with provision for versions H1 and H2, use the pins A provided on the edges of the roof fig. 130. Long wheelbase vehicles are equipped with 8 pins; short or medium wheelbase vehicles are equipped with 6 pins; vehicles with extra-long wheelbases are equipped with 10 pins. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING Check that the attachment fixing screws are tight after a few kilometres. Fully comply with the regulations in force concerning maximum clearance. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY Perform these operations only when the vehicle is stationary. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 130 F0N0138 107 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE IMPORTANT Follow the instructions contained in the assembly kit carefully. Assembly must be performed by qualified personnel. WARNING SAFETY Evenly distribute the load and take into account, when driving, the increased responsiveness of the vehicle to side wind. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES HEADLIGHTS LIGHT BEAM DIRECTION The correct direction of the headlights is essential for the comfort and safety of the driver and other road users. To ensure the best visibility when travelling with the headlights on, the headlight alignment must be correct. Contact a Fiat Dealership to have the headlights checked and adjusted. HEADLIGHT ALIGNMENT CORRECTOR Never exceed the maximum permitted loads (see chapter "Technical specifications"). This device works with the ignition key in the MAR-ON position and the dipped headlights on. The vehicle tilts backwards when it is laden, raising the beam. The beams must therefore be realigned in this case. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 108 fig. 131 F0N0516 Headlight alignment adjustment ABS SYSTEM Press or on the control panel fig. 131. The instrument panel display shows the position in relation to the adjustment set. If you have never driven a vehicle with ABS before, it is advisable to perform a few tests on slippery surface, always in safe conditions and fully complying with the Highway Code of the country where you are driving. Read the following information carefully. IMPORTANT Check the alignment of the light beams each time the weight of the load transported changes. FOG LIGHT ALIGNMENT (for versions/markets, where provided) Contact a Fiat Dealership to have the headlights checked and adjusted. ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHTS WHEN ABROAD The dipped headlights are directed for operation in the country where the vehicle was originally purchased. When in countries where you drive on the other side of the road, you need to alter the beam direction by affixing a specially designed self-adhesive film in order not to dazzle the vehicles travelling in the opposite direction. Such film is provided by Lineaccessori Fiat and is available at Fiat Dealerships. This is an integral part of the braking system, which prevents one or more wheels from locking or slipping regardless of the road surface conditions and braking intensity, ensuring control of the vehicle even during emergency braking. The EBD system (Electronic Braking Force Distribution) completes the system allowing the brake force to be distributed between the front and rear wheels. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IMPORTANT To obtain the maximum efficiency of the braking system, a bedding-in period of about 500 km is needed: during this period it is better to avoid sharp, repeated and prolonged braking. IN AN EMERGENCY SYSTEM INTERVENTION SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE The driver can feel that the ABS system has come into action because the brake pedal pulsates slightly and the system gets noisier: it means that the car speed should be altered to suit the type of road surface. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 109 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES MECHANICAL BRAKE ASSIST (emergency braking assistance) (for versions/markets, where provided) This system (which cannot be deactivated) recognises emergency braking conditions according to the speed of operation of the brake pedal and provides an additional hydraulic braking pressure to support that provided by the driver. This allows faster and more powerful operation of the braking system. IMPORTANT When the Mechanical Brake Assist is activated, noises may be heard from the system. This is normal. Anyway, while braking keep the brake pedal depressed. WARNING IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 110 When the ABS cuts in and you feel the brake pedal pulsating, do not raise your foot, but keep it pressed; in doing so you will stop in the shortest amount of space possible depending on the current road conditions. WARNING If the ABS system is activated, this indicates that the traction of the tires on the road is nearing its limit.You must slow down to a speed compatible with the available wheel traction. WARNING The ABS gets the most from the available grip, but it cannot improve it; you should therefore take every care when driving on slippery surfaces and not take unnecessary risks. FAULT INDICATIONS ABS failure This is indicated by the warning light on the instrument panel switching on together with the dedicated message on the display (for versions/ markets, where provided) (see “Warning lights and messages” section). In the case, the braking system will work as normal without the extra capacity offered by the ABS system. Drive carefully to the nearest Fiat Dealership to have the system checked. EBD failure This is indicated by the and warning lights on the instrument panel switching on together with the dedicated message on the display (for versions/markets, where provided) (see “Warning lights and messages” section). In this case, the rear wheels may suddenly lock and the vehicle may swerve when braking sharply. Drive carefully to the nearest Fiat Dealership to have the system checked. WARNING If only the warning light switches on on the instrument panel (with a message on the multifunction display on some versions), stop the car immediately and contact the nearest Fiat Dealership. Fluid leaking from the hydraulic system will compromise the operation of the braking system, whether it is of the conventional type or with ABS. ESP SYSTEM (Electronic Stability Program) (for versions/markets, where provided) This is an electronic system that controls vehicle stability in the event of tyre grip loss, helping to maintain directional control. The ESP system is therefore particularly useful when the grip conditions of road surfaces change. The MSR system (adjustment of the engine braking torque during gear changes) and the HBA system (automatic increase in the braking pressure during emergency braking) are present with ESP, ASR and Hill Holder systems (for versions/markets where provided). KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES SYSTEM INTERVENTION This is indicated by the flashing of the warning light on the instrument panel, to inform the driver that the car is in critical stability and grip conditions. IN AN EMERGENCY System activation SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE The ESP system is automatically activated when the vehicle is started and cannot be deactivated. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 111 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 112 Fault indications HILL HOLDER SYSTEM In the event of a fault, the ESP system will be automatically switched off and the warning light will switch on constantly in the instrument panel along with a message in the multifunction display (for versions/markets where provided) (see “Warning lights and messages” section). The LED in the ASR button will switch on. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. It is integral to the ESP system. It automatically activates with the following conditions: ❒ uphill: vehicle stationary on a road with a gradient higher than 5%, engine running, brake pressed and gearbox in neutral or gear (other than reverse) engaged; ❒ downhill: vehicle stationary on a road with a gradient higher than 5%, engine running, brake pressed and reverse gear engaged. When setting off, the ESP system control unit will maintain braking pressure on the wheels until the torque required for starting is attained or, in any case, for a maximum of 2 seconds in order that the right foot can be moved easily from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. When 2 seconds have elapsed, without any departure having taken place, the system is automatically deactivated, gradually releasing the braking pressure. During this release stage, the typical brake disengagement noise indicating that the vehicle is going to move imminently will be heard. WARNING ESP performance features must not induce the driver to take unnecessary or unfounded risks. Driving style must always be adapted to road conditions, visibility and traffic.The driver is always responsible for road safety. Fault indications ASR SYSTEM (Antislip Regulation) The warning light will switch on in the event of a fault (see “Warning lights and messages”). This is a traction control system that cuts in automatically every time one or both drive wheels slip. Depending on the slipping conditions, two different control systems are activated: ❒ if the slipping involves both drive wheels, the ASR intervenes reducing the power transmitted by the engine; ❒ if the slipping only involves one of the drive wheels, it intervenes automatically braking the wheel that is slipping. The action of the ASR system is especially useful in the following conditions: ❒ slipping of the inner wheel on bends due to dynamic variations in the load or excessive acceleration; ❒ excessive power transmitted to the wheels, also in relation to road surface conditions; ❒ acceleration on slippery, snowy or icy road surfaces; ❒ loss of grip on wet road surfaces (aquaplaning). IMPORTANT The Hill Holder system is not a parking brake, therefore do not leave the vehicle without activating the handbrake, switching off the engine and engaging first gear. WARNING For the correct operation of the ESP and ASR systems, the tyres must be the same make and type on all wheels, in perfect condition and, above all, of the type, make and size specified. WARNING For the correct operation of the ESP and ASR systems, the tyres must be the same make and type on all wheels, in perfect condition and, above all, of the type, make and size specified. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 113 MSR system (engine drive regulation) KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY This is an integral part of the ASR system that, in the event of a sudden gear down shift, cuts in and provides torque to the engine thus preventing excessive drive wheel drive which, especially in poor grip conditions, can lead to a loss of stability. WARNING Do not take unnecessary risks, even if your vehicle is fitted with this system. Your driving style must always be suited to the road conditions, visibility and traffic.The driver is always responsible for road safety. Activation/deactivation of the ASR system STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE The ASR system activates automatically each time the engine is started. When travelling, the ASR can be switched off and on again pressing button A fig. 132 located among the controls in the instrument panel. Switching off is shown by the LED in the switch itself switching on together with a message shown in the multifunction display, for versions/markets where provided. If the ASR is switched off when driving, it is automatically switched on again when the vehicle is started up. When travelling on snowy roads with snow chains, it may be helpful to turn the ASR off: in fact, in these conditions, slipping of the drive wheels when moving off makes it possible to obtain better traction. FAULT INDICATIONS In the event of a fault, the ASR system will be automatically switched off and the warning light in the instrument panel will switch on constantly along with a message in the multifunction display (for versions/markets, where provided) (see “Warning lights and messages” section). The LED in the ASR button will light up. In this case, contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 114 fig. 132 F0N0077 TRACTION PLUS SYSTEM Traction Plus operation (for versions/markets, where provided) The system is deactivated when starting. To activate the Traction Plus system, press the T+ button fig. 133: the LED on the button switches on. The activation of the Traction Plus system involves the following functions being switched on: ❒ inhibition of the ASR function, to exploit the engine torque fully; ❒ a differential locking effect on the front axle, through the braking system, to improve traction on irregular surfaces. If the Traction Plus system is faulty, the warning light on the instrument panel switches on constantly. Traction Plus is a driving aid, useful for setting off in poor grip conditions (snow, ice, mud, etc.) which allows the drive force to be evenly distributed over the same axle when both wheels are slipping. Traction Plus acts by braking the wheels with poor grip (or those slipping more than the others), thereby transferring the drive force to those which have greater grip on the ground. This function can be activated manually by pressing the T+ button on the dashboard fig. 133 and operates under 30 km/h. Over this speed, it is automatically deactivated (the LED on the button is still on) and it is reactivated again when the speed is below 30 km/h. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 133 F0N0509 115 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 116 EOBD SYSTEM The EOBD system (European On Board Diagnosis) allows continuous diagnosis of emission-related components on the vehicle. It also alerts the driver, by turning on the warning light in the instrument panel (together with relevant message in the multifunction display, for versions/ markets where provided) (see “Warning lights and messages” section), when these components are no longer in peak condition. The aim of the system is to: ❒ monitor system efficiency; ❒ indicate an increase in emissions due to vehicle malfunction; ❒ indicate the need to replace components which have deteriorated. The system also has a diagnosis connector that can be interfaced with suitable instruments, to read the error codes stored in the control unit together with a series of specific parameters for engine operation and diagnosis. This check can also be carried out by traffic control authorities. IMPORTANT After eliminating the failure, to check the system completely, Fiat Dealerships run a bench test and, if necessary, road tests which may also call for a long journey. WARNING If, when the ignition key is turned to the MAR-ON position, the warning light either does not come on or, when driving, it comes on permanently or flashes (along with a message in the multifunction display for versions/markets, where provided), contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. Operation of the indicator may be verified by traffic control officers using the appropriate equipment. Comply with the laws and regulations of the country where you are driving. PARKING SENSORS The parking sensors are located in the rear bumper fig. 134 and their function is to inform the driver, through an intermittent buzzer, about the presence of obstacles behind the vehicle. ACTIVATION The sensors are automatically activated when reverse gear is engaged. As the obstacle behind the vehicle gets closer to the bumper, the buzzer becomes more frequent. WARNING BUZZER When reverse gear is engaged an intermittent acoustic signal is automatically activated. The acoustic signal: ❒ increases as the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle decreases; ❒ becomes continuous when the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle is less than 30 cm and stops immediately if the distance increases; ❒ remains constant if the distance remains unchanged; if this situation concerns the side sensors, the buzzer will stop after about 3 seconds to avoid, for example, warning indications in the event of manoeuvres along walls. Detection distances Central operating range: 140 cm ±10 cm Side operating range: 60 cm ±20 cm If several obstacles are detected by the sensors, only the nearest one is considered. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES FAULT INDICATIONS IN AN EMERGENCY Any parking sensor faults will be indicated when reverse is engaged by the warning light in the instrument panel switching on together with the message in the multifunction display, for versions/markets, where provided (see chapter "Warning lights and messages”). SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 134 F0N0119 117 OPERATION WITH TRAILER KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 118 Parking sensor operation is automatically disabled when the electric cable plug of the trailer is fitted into the vehicle tow hook socket. The sensors are automatically enabled again when the trailer's cable plug is removed. IMPORTANT If you wish to leave the tow hook fitted without towing a trailer, it is advisable to contact a Fiat Dealership for the relevant system update operations because the tow hook could be detected as an obstacle by the central sensors. In washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vapour jet/high pressure washing nozzles at 10 cm at least from the sensors. For correct operation, sensors must always be clean from mud, dirt, snow or ice. Be careful not to scratch or damage the sensors while cleaning them. Avoid using dry, rough or hard cloths.The sensors should be washed using clean water with the addition of car shampoo if necessary. WARNING Parking manoeuvres however are always the driver’s responsibility.When making these manoeuvres, always make sure that no people (especially children) or animals are present in your manoeuvering space.The parking sensors serve to assist the driver, but must never allow his attention to lapse during potentially dangerous manoeuvres, even those executed at low speeds. GENERAL WARNINGS ❒ When parking, take the utmost care over obstacles that may be above or under the sensors. ❒ Objects close to the vehicle, in certain circumstances are not detected and could therefore cause damage to the vehicle or be damaged. The following conditions may influence the performance of the parking sensor system: ❒ Reduced sensor sensitivity and a reduction in the parking assistance system performance could be due to the presence on the surface of the sensor of: ice, snow, mud, thick paint. ❒ The sensor may detect a non-existent obstacle (echo noise) due to mechanical noises, for example when washing the vehicle, in case of rain, strong wind, hail. ❒ The signals sent by the sensors can also be altered by the presence of ultrasonic systems (e.g. pneumatic brake systems or pneumatic drills) near the vehicle. ❒ The performance of the parking assistance system may also be affected by the position of the sensors. For example by a change in the ride setting (caused by the wear of the shock absorbers, suspension), changing the tyres, overloading the vehicle and carrying out specific tuning operations that require the vehicle to be lowered. ❒ Detection of obstacles in the upper part of the vehicle (particularly in the case of vans or chassis cabs) may not be guaranteed because the system detects obstacles that could strike the lower part of the vehicle. START&STOP SYSTEM INTRODUCTION The Start&Stop device automatically stops the engine each time the vehicle is stationary and starts it again when the driver wants to move off. This improves the efficiency of the vehicle by reducing fuel consumption, the emission of harmful gases and noise pollution. OPERATING MODES Stopping the engine WITH MANUAL GEARBOX With the vehicle stationary, the engine stops with the gearbox in neutral and the clutch pedal released. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES Note The engine can only be stopped automatically after exceeding a speed of about 10 km/h, to prevent the engine from being repeatedly stopped when driving at walking pace. The engine being stopped is signalled by the fig. 135 icon on the display, depending on the trim level. IN AN EMERGENCY Restarting the engine TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS WITH MANUAL GEARBOX Depress the clutch pedal to restart the engine. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE INDEX 119 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES MANUAL ACTIVATION AND DEACTIVATION OF THE SYSTEM ENGINE STOPPING FAILURE CONDITIONS To activate/deactivate the system manually, press the fig. 136 button on the dashboard control trim. Start&Stop system activation A message will appear on the display when the Start&Stop system is activated. In this condition, the LED on the button is off. Start&Stop system deactivation Start&Stop system deactivation is signalled by a message on the display. The LED above the button is on when the system is deactivated. With the device activated, for reasons of comfort, limiting emissions and safety, the power unit does not stop in certain conditions, including: ❒ engine still cold; ❒ particularly cold external temperatures, if the corresponding indication is provided; ❒ battery not sufficiently charged; ❒ particulate filter regeneration in progress (diesel engines only); ❒ driver's door not shut; ❒ driver's seat belt not fastened; ❒ reverse gear engaged (for example, for parking manoeuvres); IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 120 fig. 135 F0N0540 fig. 136 F0N0541 ❒ automatic climate control, if a suitable thermal comfort level has not yet been reached or to enable MAX-DEF function. ❒ during the first period of use, to initialise the system RESTARTING CONDITIONS For reasons of comfort, limiting pollutant emissions and safety purposes, the power unit can restart automatically without any action on behalf of the driver if certain conditions are met, including: ❒ battery not sufficiently charged; ❒ reduced braking system vacuum (e.g. if the brake pedal is pressed repeatedly); ❒ vehicle in motion (e.g. when driving on roads with a gradient); ❒ stopping the engine through the Start&Stop system for more than about three minutes. ❒ automatic climate control system for adjusting the thermal comfort level or to enable MAX-DEF function. With a gear engaged, the engine can be automatically restarted only by fully depressing the clutch pedal. Note If the clutch is not pressed, when three minutes have elapsed since the engine was stopped, the engine can only be restarted using the key. Note In cases when the engine stops and this is not desired, due for example to the clutch pedal being released sharply with a gear engaged, if the Start&Stop system is active, the engine can be restarted by fully depressing the clutch pedal or by placing the gear lever in neutral. SAFETY FUNCTIONS When the engine is stopped by the Start&Stop system, if the driver unfastens their seat belt and opens the driver's door or the passenger door, the engine can only be restarted using the key. The driver is notified of this condition by a buzzer, through the fig. 135 warning light flashing in the instrument panel and, where provided, by a message in the display. "ENERGY SAVING" FUNCTION (for versions/markets, where provided) KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY If, as a result of automatic engine restarting, the driver does not carry out any action on the vehicle for an extended period (about 3 minutes), the Start&Stop system stops the engine definitively, to prevent fuel consumption. The engine can only be started using the key in such cases. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Note In any case, it is possible to keep the engine running by deactivating the Start&Stop system. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 121 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY IRREGULAR OPERATION JUMP STARTING In the event of malfunction, the Start&Stop system is deactivated. The driver is informed about the fault warning light through the switching on of the together with a message on the display. In this case, contact a Fiat Dealership. In the event of jump starting fig. 138 with a booster battery, never connect the negative lead ( - ) of the booster battery to the negative pole C of the vehicle's battery, but rather to an engine/gearbox earth point (follow the lead connection procedure described in the "Jump starting" paragraph in the chapter "In an emergency"). VEHICLE INACTIVITY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS In the event of vehicle inactivity, special attention must be paid to the disconnection of the battery power supply. Proceed as follows: detach connector A fig. 137 (by pressing button B) from sensor C for monitoring the status of the battery installed on the negative battery pole D. This sensor must never be disconnected from the pole except if the battery is replaced. IMPORTANT After turning the ignition key to STOP, wait at least 1 minute before disconnecting the electrical supply to the battery. IMPORTANT WARNING Before opening the bonnet, make sure that the vehicle is switched off and the key is in the OFF position. Follow the instructions on the label on the front crossmember. It is advisable to extract the key when there are other people in the vehicle. WARNING If the battery needs to be replaced, always contact a Fiat Dealership.The replacement battery should be of the same type (L6 105Ah/850A) and should have the same characteristics. INDEX 122 fig. 137 F0N0543 RADIO WARNING The vehicle should always be evacuated after the key has been removed or turned to the OFF position.When refuelling, make sure that the car is switched off with the key in the OFF position. WARNING If climate comfort is to be favoured, the Start&Stop system can be disabled, for a continuous operation of the climate control system. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE (for versions/markets, where provided) For radio operation, consult the Supplement attached to this Owner Handbook. SETUP (for versions/markets, where provided) SAFETY The system consists of: ❒ radio supply leads; ❒ front speaker connection cables; ❒ aerial supply lead; ❒ 2 tweeters A located in the front doors (30 W max power each) fig. 139; ❒ 2 mid-woofers B located in the front doors (165 mm diameter, 40 W max power each) fig. 140; ❒ radio aerial lead. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 138 F0N0544 fig. 139 F0N0157 123 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE The radio must be installed in the place occupied by the central storage compartment because this makes the cables provided accessible. WARNING SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING For connection to the existing devices supplied in the vehicle contact Fiat Dealership to prevent any problem that could impair vehicle safety. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES If after buying the car, you decide to install electrical accessories that require a permanent electric supply (alarm, satellite anti-theft system, etc.) or accessories that in any case burden the electric supply, contact a Fiat Dealership, whose qualified personnel, besides suggesting the most suitable devices from Lineaccessori Fiat, will also evaluate the overall electric consumption, checking whether the car's electrical system is able to withstand the load required, or whether it needs to be integrated with a more powerful battery. WARNING Take care when fitting additional spoilers, alloy wheels or non-standard wheel hubs: they could reduce the ventilation of the brakes and affect efficiency under sharp, repeated braking or on long descents. Make sure that nothing obstructs the pedal stroke (mats, etc.) IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 124 ACCESSORIES PURCHASED BY THE OWNER fig. 140 F0N0158 INSTALLING ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC DEVICES RADIO TRANSMITTERS AND MOBILE PHONES Electrical and electronic devices installed after buying the car in the context of after-sales service must carry this label: fig. 141 Fiat Auto S.p.A. authorises the installation of transceivers provided that installation is carried out at a specialised centre, in a workmanlike fashion and in compliance with manufacturer's specifications. Radio transmitter equipment (vehicle mobile phones, CB radios, amateur radio etc.) cannot be used inside the car unless a separate aerial is mounted externally. IMPORTANT Traffic police may not allow the car on the road if devices have been installed which modify the features of the car. This may also cause invalidation of warranty in relation to faults caused by the change either directly or indirectly related to it. Fiat Auto S.p.A. shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by Fiat Auto S.p.A. or not installed in compliance with the instructions provided. IMPORTANT The use of these devices inside the passenger compartment (without an external aerial) may cause the electrical systems to malfunction. This could compromise the safety of the car in addition to constituting a potential hazard for passengers' health. In addition, transmission and reception of these devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the car body. As far as the use of EC-approved mobile phones is concerned (GSM, GPRS, UMTS), follow the usage instructions provided by the mobile phone manufacturer. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 141 125 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY PROVISION FOR FITTING TELEPASS ON REFLECTIVE WINDSCREEN (for versions/markets, where provided) REFUELLING THE VEHICLE If the vehicle is equipped with a reflective windscreen, install the Telepass in the appropriate area shown in fig. 142 - fig. 143. If the outside temperature is very low, diesel fluidity may become insufficient due to the formation of paraffin clots with consequent defective operation of the fuel supply system. In order to avoid these problems, different types of diesel fuel are distributed according to the season: summer type, winter type and arctic type (cold/mountain areas). If refuelling with diesel fuel whose specifications are not suitable for the current temperature, it is advisable to mix TUTELA DIESEL ART additive in the proportions shown on the container with the fuel. Pour the additive into the tank before the diesel fuel. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES OPERATION AT LOW TEMPERATURES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 126 fig. 142 F0N0245 fig. 143 F0N0246 When using or parking the vehicle for a long time in the mountains or cold areas, it is advisable to refuel using locally available diesel fuel. In this case, it is also advisable to keep the tank over 50% full. Only refuel with automotive diesel complying with the European specification EN 590.The use of other products or mixtures may damage the engine beyond repair and consequently invalidate the warranty, due to the damage caused. If you accidentally introduce other types of fuel into the tank, do not start the engine. Empty the tank. If the engine has been run for even an extremely limited amount of time, you must not only drain the fuel tank, but the rest of the supply circuit as well. FUEL TANK CAP To carry out fuelling, open flap A fig. 144 and unscrew cap B; the cap is fitted with a safety device C which fastens it to the flap so it cannot be mislaid. The sealing may cause a slight pressure increase in the tank. A little breathing off, while slackening the cap is absolutely normal. When refuelling, fasten the cap to the device inside the flap as shown in fig. 144. WARNING Do not bring naked flames or lit cigarettes near to the fuel tank opening: fire risk. Keep your face away from the fuel filler to prevent breathing in harmful vapours. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY REFUELLING CAPACITY To fill the tank completely, top up twice after the pump switches off. Further top-ups could cause faults in the fuel feeding system. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 144 F0N0068 127 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 128 PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF) The following devices are used for reducing diesel fuel engine emissions: ❒ oxidising catalytic converter; ❒ exhaust gas recirculation system (EGR); ❒ particulate filter (DPF) (for versions/markets, where provided). The Diesel Particulate Filter is a mechanical filter, integral with the exhaust system, that physically traps particulates present in the exhaust gases of Diesel engines. The diesel particulate filter has been adopted to eliminate almost all particulates in compliance with current / future legal regulations. During normal use of the vehicle, the engine management control unit records a set of data (travel time, type of route, temperatures, etc.) and it will then calculate how much particulate has been trapped by the filter. Since this filter physically traps particulate, it should be regenerated (cleaned) at regular intervals by burning the carbon particles. The regeneration procedure is controlled automatically by the engine management control unit according to the filter conditions and vehicle use conditions. There may be a limited increase in the engine idle speed during the regeneration, a limited increase in fumes and high temperatures at the exhaust. These are not faults; they do not impair vehicle performance or damage the environment. If the dedicated message is displayed, refer to paragraph "Warning lights and messages". WARNING The diesel particulate filter (DPF) reaches high temperatures during operation. Do not park the car on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other flammable material: fire hazard. SAFETY SEAT BELTS USING THE SEAT BELTS The belt should be worn keeping the torso straight and rested against the backrest. To fasten the seat belts, grip the tongue A fig. 145 and insert it into the buckle B, until the locking click is heard. On removal, if it jams, let it rewind for a short stretch, then pull it out again without jerking. To unfasten the seat belts, press button C. Guide the seat belt with your hand while it is rewinding, to prevent it from twisting. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Through the reel, the belt automatically adapts to the body of the passenger wearing it, allowing freedom of movement. The reel may lock up when the vehicle is parked on a steep slope: this is perfectly normal. Furthermore, the reel mechanism locks the belt if it is pulled sharply or in the event of sudden braking, collisions and high-speed bends. WARNING Never press button C fig. 145 when travelling. SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 145 F0N0069 129 HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE WARNING The height of the seat belts must be adjusted with the vehicle at a standstill. Seat belt with reel for front central place on bench seat The two-seater front bench is equipped with an on-board seat belt (reel on seat) with three anchorage points for the central position fig. 147. To adjust, use button A fig. 146 and raise or lower handle B. Always adjust the seat belt height to the passenger's body: This precaution may considerably reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. Correct adjustment is obtained when the belt passes approximately half way between the shoulder and the neck. WARNING After adjustment, always check that the cursor to which the ring is fastened is locked in one of the set positions. Release the grip and push downwards to enable the locking device to click if the grip has not been released in one of the possible positions. fig. 146 F0N0070 fig. 147 F0N0156 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 130 SBR SYSTEM PRETENSIONERS The vehicle is fitted with a Seat Belt Reminder system (SBR), consisting of a buzzer and the flashing warning light on the instrument panel which warns the driver that the seat belt must be fastened. The buzzer can be deactivated (until the next time the engine stops) as follows: ❒ fasten the driver's seat belt; ❒ turn the ignition key to the MAR-ON position; ❒ wait for over 20 seconds and then release one of the seat belts. For permanent deactivation, contact a Fiat Dealership. With a digital display, the SBR system can be reactivated only at a Fiat Dealership. With a multifunction display, the SBR system can also be re-enabled through the setup menu. To increase the protective efficiency of the front seat belts, the vehicle is fitted with pretensioners. These devices, in the event of a violent head-on crash or side impact, rewind the seat belts a few centimetres. In this way, they ensure that the belts fit tightly to the wearer before the restraining action begins. The seat belt locks to indicate that the device has intervened; the seat belt cannot be drawn back up even when guiding it manually. IMPORTANT To obtain the highest degree of protection from the action of the pretensioning device, wear the seat belt tight to the chest and pelvis. A slight discharge of smoke may be produced during the activation of the pretensioner which is not in harmful and does not involve any fire hazard. The pretensioner does not require any maintenance or lubrication. Any changes to their original conditions will invalidate their efficiency. If, due to unusual natural events (floods, sea storms, etc.), the device has been affected by water and mud, it must absolutely be replaced. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 131 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY WARNING The pretensioner may be used only once. After it is triggered, have it replaced at a Fiat Dealership. Consult the data plate in the glove box to check the status of the pretensioners. Go to a Fiat Dealership to have the device replaced when the expiration date approaches. Operations which lead to knocks, vibrations or localised heating (over 100°C for a maximum of 6 hours) in the area around the pretensioners may cause damage or trigger them.These devices are not affected by vibrations caused by irregularities of the road surface or low obstacles such as kerbs, etc. Contact a Fiat Dealership for any assistance. LOAD LIMITERS To increase passenger safety, the front seat belt reels contain a load limiter which controls the force acting on the chest and shoulders during the belt restraining action in the event of a head-on collision. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR USING THE SEAT BELTS The driver is responsible for respecting (and ensuring that all the other passengers also respect) the local laws in force regarding the use of seat belts. Always fasten the seat belts before starting. Seat belts must also be worn by expectant mothers: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is greatly reduced for them and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt. Pregnant women must position the lower part of the belt very low down so that it passes over the pelvis and under the abdomen (see fig. 148). SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 132 fig. 148 F0N0120 WARNING WARNING The belt must not be twisted.The upper part must pass over the shoulder and cross the chest diagonally.The lower part must adhere to the pelvis (as shown in fig. 149) rather than the abdomen of the passenger. Never use devices (clips, pegs, etc.) to hold the seat belt away from your body. For maximum safety, keep the back of your seat upright, lean back into it and make sure the seat belt fits closely across your chest and pelvis. Always fasten the seat belts on both the front and the rear seats! Travelling without wearing seat belts will increase the risk of serious injury and even death in the event of an accident. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING Removing or otherwise tampering with safety belt and pretensioner components is strictly prohibited. Any operations on these components must be performed by qualified and authorised technicians. Always go to a Fiat Dealership. WARNING If the belt has been sharply pulled, for example as the result of an accident, the safety belt, together with the anchoring devices, the anchoring device mounting screws and the pretensioner must be completely replaced. Even if the belt does not present any exterior signs of wear or damage, it may have lost its restraining properties. fig. 149 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX F0N0121 133 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SEAT BELTS MAINTENANCE WARNING Each seat belt must be used by only one person. Never travel with a child sitting on the passenger's lap and a single belt to protect them both fig. 150. In general, do not place any objects between the person and belt. WARNING If the belt has been sharply pulled, for example as the result of an accident, the safety belt, together with the anchoring devices, the anchoring device mounting screws and the pretensioner must be completely replaced. Even if the belt does not present any exterior signs of wear or damage, it may have lost its restraining properties. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 134 fig. 150 F0N0122 To maintain the seat belts in efficient conditions, observe the following: ❒ always use the belt with the strap well stretched and never twisted; make sure that it is free to run without obstructions; ❒ replace the belt after an accident of a certain severity even if it does not appear to be damaged. Always replace the belt if the pretensioners were deployed; ❒ to clean the belt, wash by hand with water and neutral soap, rinse and leave to dry in the shade. Never use strong detergents, bleach, paints or any other substance which could damage the belt fibres; ❒ prevent the reels from getting wet: their correct operation is only guaranteed if water does not get inside; ❒ replace the seat belt when it shows wear or cuts. CARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY For optimal protection in the event of a collision, all passengers must be seated and wearing adequate restraint systems. This is even more important for children. This prescription is compulsory in all EC countries according to EC Directive 2003/20/EC. A child's head is larger and heavier than an adult's in proportion to its body, while their muscular and bone structures are not fully developed. Therefore, correct restraint systems are necessary which are different from adult seat belts. The results of research on the best child restraint systems are contained in the European Standard ECE-R44, which enforces the use of restraint systems classified into five groups: Group Weight groups Group 0 up to 10 kg Group 0+ up to 13 kg Group 1 9-18 kg Group 2 15-25 kg Group 3 22-36 kg As you can see, the groups overlap partly and, in fact, there are devices on sale that cover more than one weight group. All restraint devices must bear the type-approval data along with the control mark on a label firmly secured to the child seat which must never be removed. Over 1.50 m in height, from the point of view of restraint systems, children are considered as adults and wear the seat belts normally. Lineaccessori Fiat offers child restraint systems for each weight group. These devices are recommended, having been specifically designed for Fiat vehicles. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING Do not place a cradle seat facing backwards on the front seat if the passenger side air bag is on. Deployment of the air bag in an accident could cause fatal injuries to the baby regardless of the severity of the collision. It is advisable to always carry children in a child seat on the rear seat, which is the most protected position in the event of a collision. If you need to carry a child on the front passenger seat in a cradle seat facing backwards, the passenger side air bags (front and side bags, for versions/markets, where provided) must be deactivated using the setup menu. It is important to check the performed deactivation on the warning light on the instrument panel.The passenger seat must also be slid back as far as possible in order to avoid the child seat from coming into contact with the dashboard. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 135 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY GROUP 0 and 0+ GROUP 1 Babies up to 13 kg must be carried facing backwards on a cradle seat, which, supporting the head, does not induce stress on the neck in the event of sharp decelerations. The cradle is restrained by the vehicle's seat belts, as shown in fig. 151 and it must restrain the child in turn with its own belts. Children from 9 kg to 18 kg in weight can be carried facing forwards if the child seat is fitted with a front cushion, through which the vehicle's seat belt restrains both child and seat fig. 152. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES WARNING The figures are only examples for fitting purposes. Install the car seat according to the instructions, which must be included with this type of restraint system. WARNING The figures are only examples for fitting purposes. Install the car seat according to the instructions, which must be included with this type of restraint system. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 136 fig. 151 F0N0123 fig. 152 F0N0124 WARNING Car seats for weight groups 0 and 1 feature an attachment in front of the vehicle safety belts as well as its own belts to restrain the child. Due to their weight, they may be dangerous if incorrectly mounted (e.g. if fastened to the vehicle seat belts placing a cushion in between). Follow the installation instructions provided carefully. GROUP 2 Children from 15 to 25 kg may use the vehicle's seat belts directly fig. 153. The child seat is now needed only to position the child correctly with respect to the belts so that the diagonal section crosses the child's chest and never the neck, and the lower part is snug on the pelvis not the abdomen. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING The figures are only examples for fitting purposes. Install the car seat according to the instructions, which must be included with this type of restraint system. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 153 F0N0125 137 GROUP 3 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY WARNING For children from 22 to 36 kg the size of the child’s chest means that a support to space the child’s back from the backrest is no longer required. The fig. 154 shows an example of correct child seat positioning on the rear seat. Children over 1.50 m in height can wear seat belts like adults. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 138 fig. 154 F0N0126 The figures are only examples for fitting purposes. Install the car seat according to the instructions, which must be included with this type of restraint system. SUITABILITY OF PASSENGER SEATS FOR THE USE OF CHILD SEATS The vehicle complies with the new European Directive 2000/3/EC which governs the arrangement possibilities for child seats on the seats of a vehicle as shown in the following table (the table refers to the Van, Combi and Panorama versions): Group Weight groups CAB 1st and 2nd REAR SEATS ROW SAFETY Single or twoseater seat (1 or 2 passengers) Rear left side passenger Rear right side passenger Central passenger Up to 13 kg U U U U Group 1 9-18 kg U U U U Group 2 15-25 kg U U U U Group 3 22-36 kg Group 0, 0+ KNOW YOUR VEHICLE U U U U U suitable for child restraint systems in the "Universal" category, according to European Standard ECE-R44 for the specified "Groups". STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 139 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 140 Below is a summary of the main safety rules to be followed when carrying children ❒ The recommended position for installing child seats is on the rear seat, as it is the most protected area in the event of a crash. ❒ If the passenger's air bag is deactivated always check the warning light on the instrument panel to make sure that it has actually been deactivated. ❒ Carefully follow the instructions supplied with the child seat which are mandatory by law. Keep the instructions in the vehicle along with the other papers and this handbook. Do not use second-hand child seats without instructions. ❒ Always check that the seat belt is well fastened by pulling on it. ❒ Only one child is to be strapped into each retaining system; never carry two children using one child seat. ❒ Always check that the seat belts do not restrain the child's throat. ❒ While travelling, do not let the child sit incorrectly or release the belts. ❒ Never carry children on your lap, even newborns. No-one can restrain a child in the event of an accident. ❒ In the event of an accident, replace the child seat with a new one. WARNING Do not place a cradle seat facing backwards on the front seat if the passenger side air bag is on. Deployment of the air bag in an accident could cause fatal injuries to the baby regardless of the severity of the collision. It is advisable to always carry children in a child seat on the rear seat, which is the most protected position in the event of a collision. SETUP FOR “UNIVERSAL ISOFIX” CHILD SEAT The vehicle can be fitted with a Universal Isofix child seat, a new European standardised system for carrying children safely. An example of a child seat is shown in fig. 155. Due to its different attachment system, the child seat must be secured using the special lower metal rings A fig. 156, positioned between rear backrest and cushion. The upper belt (provided with the child seat) must be then secured to ring B fig. 157 located in the lower part of the seat. It is possible to have a mixed assembly of traditional child seats and Universal Isofix seats. Remember that in case of Universal Isofix child seats, you can use all seats approved with the marking ECE R44/03 “Universal Isofix”. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 155 F0N0236 fig. 156 F0N0234 141 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY WARNING WARNING Fit the child seat only when the vehicle is stationary.The child seat is correctly anchored to the brackets when you hear the click. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 157 142 F0N0235 Follow the instructions for positioning, fitting and removing which the child seat manufacturer must supply together with the seat. PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE FOR USING UNIVERSAL ISOFIX CHILD SEATS The table below shows the different installation possibilities for Universal Isofix child seats on the seats fitted with Isofix attachments, in accordance with European regulation ECE 16. Weight group Portable cradle Group 0 (up to 10 kg) Group 0+ (up to 13 kg) Group I (from 9 to 18 kg) Child seat position Isofix size class Rear side Isofix position, 1st row (PANORAMA) Rear side Isofix position, 1st row (COMBI) Rearward facing F X X Rearward facing G X X Rearward facing E IL IL Rearward facing E IL IL Rearward facing D IL IL Rearward facing C IL IL Rearward facing D IL IL Rearward facing C IL IL Forward facing B IUF IUF Forward facing B1 IUF IUF Forward facing A IUF IUF X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this group of weight and/or size class. IL: suitable for Isofix child restraint systems of the "Specific for the vehicle", "Restricted", or "Semiuniversal" categories, approved for this type of vehicle. IUF: suitable for forward facing Isofix child restraint systems in the Universal category and type-approved for the use in the weight group. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 143 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 144 FRONT AIR BAGS The vehicle is provided with front air bags for the driver and the passenger. The front driver / passenger air bags have been designed to protect the occupants in the event of head-on crashes of medium-high severity, by placing the cushion between the occupant and the steering wheel or dashboard. Therefore non-deployment in other types of impacts (side impacts, rear shunts, roll-overs, etc.) does not indicate a system malfunction. An electronic control unit causes the bag to inflate in the event of a head-on crash. The bag will inflate instantaneously placing itself between the front occupants body and the structures which could cause injury. It will deflate immediately afterwards. Driver and passenger front air bags are not a replacement of but complementary to the belts, which you are recommended to always wear, as specified by law in Europe and most non-European countries. The volume of the front air bags at maximum inflation fills most of the space between the steering wheel and the driver and between the dashboard and the passenger. In the event of an impact, those not wearing a seat belt will move forward and come into contact with the bag which is still inflating. The protection offered by the cushion is reduced in such a case. Front air bags may not activate in the following situations: ❒ frontal impacts against highly deformable objects not involving the front surface of the vehicle (e.g. wing collision against guard rail, etc.); ❒ jamming of the vehicle underneath other vehicles or protective barriers (e.g. underneath a truck or a guard rail); in this case, the bags would offer no additional protection with respect to the seat belt and their deployment is unnecessary. Lack of deployment in such cases is consequently not the sign of a fault. WARNING Do not apply stickers or other objects to the steering wheel, the dashboard in the passenger side air bag area and the seats. Never put objects (e.g. mobile phones) on the passenger side of the dashboard since they could interfere with correct inflation of the passenger air bag and also cause serious injury to the passengers. The air bags are not deployed in the event of minor frontal collisions (for which the restraining action of the seat belts is sufficient). Safety belts must always be worn. In the event of frontal collisions they guarantee correct positioning of the passenger. FRONT DRIVER SIDE AIR BAG It consists of an instantly inflating bag contained in a special recess in the centre of the steering wheel fig. 158. FRONT PASSENGER SIDE AIR BAG (for versions/markets, where provided) This consists of an instantly inflating bag contained in a special recess in the dashboardfig. 159: this bag has a larger volume than that of the driver. WARNING Do not arrange cradle child seats facing backwards if the passenger's air bag is on. Deployment of the air bag in an accident could cause fatal injuries to the child. Always deactivate the passenger air bag when placing a child seat on the front seat.The passenger seat must also be slid back as far as possible in order to avoid the child seat from coming into contact with the dashboard.Though not required by law, we recommend that you reactivate this air bag as soon as the child no longer needs to be transported in the vehicle's front seat. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 158 F0N0324 fig. 159 F0N0072 145 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 146 MANUAL DEACTIVATION OF PASSENGER SIDE FRONT AIR BAG AND SIDE BAG (for versions/markets, where provided) If a child must be carried on the front seat, the front passenger side air bag and side bag for chest protection (for versions/markets where provided) must be deactivated. The instrument panel warning light will stay on constantly until the passenger's front air bag and the Side Bag for chest protection are reactivated (for versions/markets where provided). IMPORTANT To manually deactivate the passenger side front air bag and side bag for chest protection (for versions/markets where provided), refer to section "Knowing your car", paragraph “Multifunction display”. SIDE BAGS The vehicle is fitted with front side bags for driver and passenger (for versions/markets where provided) for protecting the chest and window bags (for versions/markets where provided) for protecting front and rear passengers' heads. Side bags (for versions/markets where provided) protect occupants from side impacts of medium-high severity, by placing the bag between the occupant and the internal parts of the side structure of the vehicle. Non-activation of side bags in other types of collisions (front collisions, rear shunts, roll-overs, etc...) is not a system malfunction. An electronic control unit causes the bags to inflate in the event of a side-on collision. The bags inflate instantaneously placing themselves between the occupants' bodies and the structures which could cause injury. They deflate immediately afterwards. Side bags (for versions/markets where provided) are not a replacement of but complementary to the belts, which you are recommended to always wear, as specified by law in Europe and most non-European countries. FRONT SIDE BAGS FOR CHEST PROTECTION (for versions/markets, where provided) SIDE AIR BAGS FOR HEAD PROTECTION (WINDOW BAGS) (for versions/markets, where provided) Housed in the seats' backrests fig. 160, they consist of an instantly inflating bag designed to protect the occupants' chest and pelvis zone in the event of a side impact of medium-high severity. They consist of two curtain bags, one on the right and the other on the left side of the vehicle, located behind the side coverings of the roof and covered by specific finishing fig. 161. Window bags are designed to protect the head of front and rear occupants in the event of side crash, thanks to the wide bag inflation surface. IMPORTANT In the event of a side-on crash, the system offers best protection if you keep a correct position on the seat because this allows the side bags to inflate correctly. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 160 F0N0140 fig. 161 F0N0133 147 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 148 IMPORTANT The front air bags and/or side bags may be deployed if the vehicle is subject to heavy knocks or accidents involving the underbody area, such as for example violent shocks, against steps, kerbs or low obstacles, vehicle falling into big potholes or depressions in the road. IMPORTANT A small amount of dust will be released when the air bags are deployed. The dust is not harmful and does not indicate the beginning of a fire. Furthermore, the surface of the deployed bag and the interior of the vehicle may be covered in a dusty residue: this may irritate your skin and eyes. Wash with mild soap and water in the event of exposure. The expiration dates of the explosive charge and the clock wire are shown on a label contained in the glove box. Contact a Fiat Dealership to have the devices replaced when the expiry date approaches. IMPORTANT Should an accident occur in which any of the safety devices are activated, take the vehicle to a Fiat Dealership to have the activated devices replaced and to have the whole system checked. Every control, repair and replacement operation concerning the air bags must only be carried out at a Fiat Dealership. If you are having the vehicle scrapped, have the system deactivated at a Fiat Dealership first. If the vehicle changes ownership, the new owner must be informed of how to use the air bags and the above warnings and also be given this "Owner Handbook". IMPORTANT Pretensioners, front air bags and front side bags are deployed differently according to the type of collision. Failure to deploy of one of the devices does not necessarily indicate a system malfunction. WARNING Never rest your head, arms or elbows on the doors, on the windows or in the window bag area as this could cause injuries during the inflation phase. WARNING Never lean your head, arms or elbows out of the window. GENERAL WARNINGS WARNING If when turning the key to MAR-ON the warning light does not turn on or if it stays on when travelling (together with the message on the multifunction display, for versions/markets where provided), there could be a fault in the safety systems; in this event, air bags or pretensioners may not trigger in the case of impact or, in a lower number of cases, they could be triggered accidentally. Contact a Fiat Dealership immediately to have the system checked. WARNING Do not cover the backrest of the front or rear seats with covers which are not suitable for use with side bags. WARNING Always drive with both hands on the steering wheel so that, if the air bags must be deployed, they may do so freely. Do not drive with your body bent forward. Keep your back straight against the backrest. WARNING Air bags may be deployed if another vehicle crashes into the vehicle if the key is inserted and at MAR-ON even if the engine is not running when the vehicle is stationary. For this reason, children must never sit on the front seat, even if the vehicle is not moving. On the other hand, if the key is inserted in STOP position, none of the safety devices (air bags or pretensioners) will be deployed in the event of impact. Non-deployment of these devices does not indicate a system malfunction. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE WARNING Do not travel carrying objects in your lap, in front of your chest or between your lips (pipe, pencils, etc.): they could cause severe injury if the air bag is deployed. WARNING If your vehicle has been subject to theft, attempted theft, vandalism, or flooding, see your Fiat Dealership to have the air bag system inspected. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 149 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS WARNING When the ignition key is turned to MAR-ON, the warning light (with passenger's front air bag activated) turns on and flashes for a few seconds to remind you that the passenger's air bag will be deployed in a crash, after which it should go off. WARNING Do not wash the seats with water or pressurised steam (wash by hand or at automatic seat washing stations). WARNING The front air bag is designed to be deployed for impacts of a greater intensity than for the pretensioners. For impacts whose intensity falls between the two levels, normally, only the pretensioners will be activated. WARNING Do not affix rigid objects to the garment hooks or support handles. INDEX 150 WARNING The airbag does not replace seat belts but increases their efficiency. Furthermore, since front airbags are not deployed in low-speed frontal impacts, side impacts, rear shunts or roll-overs, the passengers are protected only by the seat belts which must therefore be fastened at all times. STARTING AND DRIVING STARTING THE ENGINE The vehicle is fitted with an electronic engine lock device: if the engine fails to start, see the paragraph “The Fiat CODE system” in section “Know your vehicle”. It is advisable not to demand maximum performance from your vehicle (e.g. excessive acceleration, long distances at high speeds, excessive intense braking, etc.) during the initial period of use. When the engine is switched off never leave the key turned to MAR-ON to prevent useless current absorption from draining the battery. WARNING It is dangerous to run the engine in enclosed areas.The engine takes in oxygen and releases carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide and other toxic gases. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Remember that the brake servo and power steering are not operational until the engine has been started, therefore much effort than usual is required on the brake pedal and steering wheel. SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING PROCEDURE Proceed as follows: ❒ ensure that the handbrake is up; ❒ put the gear lever into neutral; ❒ turn the ignition key to MAR-ON: the warning lights and on the instrument panel will turn on; ❒ wait for the warning lights and to switch off. The hotter the engine is, the quicker this will happen; ❒ press the clutch pedal down to the floor without touching the accelerator; ❒ turn the ignition key to AVV as soon as warning light switches off. Waiting too long will waste the work done by the glow plugs. Release the key as soon as the engine starts. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 151 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 152 If the engine does not start at the first attempt, return the ignition key to STOP before repeating the procedure. If, when the ignition key is at MAR-ON the warning light remains lit, turn the key to STOP and then back to MAR-ON; if the warning light remains lit, try with the other keys provided with the car. IMPORTANT Go to a Fiat Dealership immediately if warning light stays on constantly on the instrument panel. WARMING UP THE ENGINE JUST AFTER IT HAS STARTED Proceed as follows: ❒ Drive off slowly, letting the engine turn at medium revs. Do not accelerate abruptly; ❒ Do not demand full performance at first. Wait until the engine coolant temperature gauge starts moving. IMPORTANT Never leave the ignition key in MAR-ON position when the engine is stopped. Remember that the brake servo and power steering are not operational until the engine has been started, so you need to apply much more force than usual to the brake pedal and steering wheel. Warning light will flash for 60 seconds after starting or during prolonged cranking to indicate a fault with the glow plug heating system. Use the vehicle normally if the engine starts, but go to a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. Never bump start the engine by pushing, towing or coasting downhill.This could cause fuel to flow into the catalytic converter and damage it beyond repair. STOPPING THE ENGINE PARKING Turn the ignition key to STOP while the engine is idling. Proceed as follows: ❒ Stop the engine and engage the handbrake; ❒ engage a gear (on a slope, engage first gear if the car is facing uphill or reverse if it is facing downhill) and leave the wheels steered. If the vehicle is parked on a steep slope, it is advisable to block the wheels with a wedge or stone. Do not leave the key in the ignition as this drains the battery. Always remove the key when you leave the car. A quick burst on the accelerator before turning off the engine serves absolutely no practical purpose, it wastes fuel and is especially damaging to turbocharged engines. In some cases, when the engine switches off, the fan could start for max. 120 seconds. WARNING Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always remove the ignition key when leaving the vehicle and take it out with you. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 153 HANDBRAKE KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES The handbrake lever is located to the left of the driver's seat fig. 162. Pull the lever upwards to engage the handbrake and ensure that the vehicle does not move. Four or five notches are normally sufficient to brake the vehicle on flat ground, while nine or ten may be necessary on a steep slope with the vehicle loaded. IMPORTANT If this is not the case, contact a Fiat Dealership to have the handbrake adjusted. When the handbrake is on and the ignition key is at MAR-ON, the instrument panel warning light will come on. Proceed as follows to release the handbrake: ❒ slightly lift the handbrake and press release button A; ❒ keep button A pressed and lower the lever. The warning light in the instrument panel will go out. Press the brake pedal when carrying out this operation to prevent the vehicle from moving accidentally. IMPORTANT Apply the handbrake lever only when the vehicle is at a standstill or with the vehicle in motion only in the event of a failure in the hydraulic system. If exceptional use is made of the handbrake with the vehicle in motion, moderate traction is advisable in order not to cause locking of the rear end with consequent swerving of the vehicle. IN AN EMERGENCY If the vehicle is equipped with selflevelling air suspension, always check that there is sufficient space above the roof and around the vehicle when parking. Indeed, the vehicle could raise (or lower) automatically depending on load or temperature changes. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 154 fig. 162 F0N0073 USING THE GEARBOX WARNING To engage the gears, press the clutch pedal fully and put the gear lever into the required position (the diagram is shown on the knob fig. 163). To engage 6th gear (where provided), operate the lever by pressing it towards the right in order to avoid engaging 4th gear by mistake. The action is similar for shifting from 6th gear to 5th gear. Press the clutch pedal fully to change gears correctly. It is therefore essential that there is nothing under the pedals: make sure the mats are lying flat and do not get in the way of the pedals. IMPORTANT Reverse may only be engaged when the vehicle is at a standstill. With the engine running, wait for at least 2 seconds with the clutch pedal fully pressed before engaging reverse to prevent damage to the gears and grating. To engage reverse R from neutral, proceed as follows: raise ring A under the knob and at the same time move the gear lever to the right and then backwards. Do not drive with your hand resting on the gear lever as the force exerted, even if slight, could lead over time to premature wear of the gearbox internal components.The clutch pedal should be used only for gear changes. Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, however lightly. For versions/ markets where provided, the electronic clutch control could cut in, interpreting the incorrect driving style as a fault. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 163 F0N0074 155 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 156 LOADING ADVICE The Fiat Ducato version that you are using has been designed and type approved on the basis of certain maximum weights (see "Weights" table in the "Technical Data" chapter): kerb weight, payload, total weight, maximum weight on front axle, maximum weight on rear axle, towable weight. Each of these must be strictly observed and MUST NEVER BE EXCEEDED in any case. In particular, ensure that you never exceed the maximum permitted weights on the front and rear axles when arranging the load on the vehicle (particularly if the vehicle is equipped with a specific trim level). IMPORTANT The maximum permitted load on the floor fastenings is 500 kg; the maximum permitted load on the side panel is 150 kg. WARNING Irregular trajectories and abrupt braking may cause sudden movements of the load with consequent situations of hazard for the driver and passengers: before setting off, secure the load tightly using the appropriate hooks on the floor and use steel cables, ropes or chains strong enough to hold the items to be secured. WARNING If a vehicle is parked on a very steep gradient or with a side gradient, opening the rear door or side door could cause any unsecured items to emerge suddenly. IMPORTANT For versions with right and left side flaps, it is advisable to reposition the release lever in the closed position before lowering the sides. WARNING If you wish to carry petrol in a reserve tank, observe the legal restrictions and only use a tank that is type approved and properly secured to the load anchorage eyebolts. However, by doing so, you increase the risk of fire in the event of an accident. In addition to these general precautions, some simple precautions can improve driving safety, travelling comfort and vehicle durability: ❒ distribute the load evenly over the floor: if it is necessary to concentrate it in a single area, choose an area mid-way between both axles; ❒ remember that the lower the load, the lower the vehicle's centre of gravity, making for a safer drive: therefore always position the heaviest goods lower down; ❒ lastly, remember that the vehicle's dynamic behaviour is affected by the weight transported: in particular, the stopping distances are longer, especially at high speed. SAVING FUEL Some useful tips are given below for fuel saving and reducing harmful emissions of CO2 and other pollutants (nitrogen oxides, unburnt hydrocarbons, Particulate Matter (PM) etc.). GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS The general factors that affect fuel consumption are listed below. Vehicle maintenance Have checks and adjustments on the vehicle carried out in accordance with the “Scheduled Servicing Plan”. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES Tyres Check the tyre pressure at least once every 4 weeks: if the pressure is too low, consumption levels increase as resistance to rolling is higher. Unnecessary loads Do not travel with an overloaded boot. The weight of the vehicle (especially when driving in town) and its geometry greatly affect fuel consumption and stability. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 157 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY Roof rack/ski rack DRIVING STYLE Remove the roof rack or the ski rack from the roof after use. These accessories decrease aerodynamic penetration of the vehicle and have a negative effect on fuel consumption. When transporting particularly large objects, use a trailer if possible. The main driving styles that affect fuel consumption are listed below. Electrical devices STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES Only use electrical devices for the amount of time needed. The heated rear window, additional headlights, windscreen/rear window wipers and heater fan need a considerable amount of energy, therefore increasing fuel consumption (by up to 25% in the urban cycle). Climate control IN AN EMERGENCY Air conditioning leads to higher fuel consumption (on average up to +20%). If the temperature outside permits, try and use the ventilation only. Starting Do not warm the engine with the vehicle at a standstill or at idle or high speed: under these conditions the engine warms up much more slowly, increasing consumption and emissions. It is therefore advisable to move off immediately, slowly, avoiding high speeds: in this way the engine will warm up more quickly. Unnecessary actions Avoid revving up when at traffic lights or before stopping the engine. This and also double declutching is absolutely pointless on modern cars and also increases consumption and pollution. Gear selection SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 158 Devices for aerodynamic control The use of non-certified devices for aerodynamic control may adversely affect air drag and fuel consumption. Use a higher gear as soon as traffic and road conditions allow. Using a low gear for faster acceleration will increase consumption. In the same way improper use of a high gear increases consumption, emissions and engine wear. Maximum speed Traffic and road conditions Fuel consumption increases considerably with speed. Maintain a constant speed, avoiding unnecessary braking and acceleration, which cost in terms of both fuel consumption and emissions. Rather high fuel consumption is caused by heavy traffic, for instance when travelling in a queue with frequent use of low gears or in large towns with many traffic lights. Winding mountain roads and rough road surfaces also adversely affect consumption. Acceleration Sudden acceleration has a very negative effect on fuel consumption and emissions: accelerate gradually. CONDITIONS OF USE The main usage conditions that negatively affect fuel consumption are listed below. Cold starting Short distances and frequent cold start-ups will prevent the engine from reaching optimal running temperature. Consequently, both consumption (from +15 to +30% on urban cycle ) and emissions will increase. Stops in traffic During prolonged stops (e.g. level crossings) the engine should be switched off. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 159 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 160 TOWING TRAILERS IMPORTANT NOTES The vehicle must be provided with a type-approved tow hook and adequate electrical system to tow caravans or trailers. Installation should be carried out by specialised personnel who will issue the required papers for travelling on roads. Fit any specific and/or additional rear view mirrors as specified by the Highway Code. Remember that, when towing a trailer, steep hills are harder to climb, braking distances increase and overtaking takes longer relative to the overall weight of the trailer. Engage a low gear when driving downhill, rather than constantly using the brake. The weight of the trailer on the vehicle tow hook will reduce the loading capacity of the vehicle by the same amount. Consider the weight of the trailer fully laden, including accessories and luggage, to make sure you do not exceed the maximum towable weight (shown on the vehicle registration document). Respect the speed limits specific to each country for vehicles towing trailers. In any case, the maximum speed must not exceed 100 km/h. You are advised to fit a suitable stabiliser to the trailer drawbar. WARNING The ABS device with which the vehicle may be equipped will not control the braking system of the trailer. Particular caution is required on slippery roads. WARNING Never modify the braking system of the vehicle to control the trailer brake. The trailer braking system must be fully independent from the hydraulic system of the vehicle. INSTALLING THE TOW HOOK The towing device should be fixed to the body by specialised personnel in accordance with any additional information supplied by the manufacturer of the device. The towing device must meet current regulations with reference to Directive 94/20/EEC and subsequent amendments. For any version the towing device used must match the towable weight of the vehicle on which it is to be installed. For the electrical connection, a standard connector should be used which is generally placed on a special bracket normally fixed to the towing device, and a special control unit for external trailer light control must be installed on the vehicle. For the electrical connection, 7 or 13 pin 12 V DC connections are to be used (CUNA/UNI and ISO/DIN Standards). Follow the instructions provided by the vehicle manufacturer and/or the tow hitch manufacturer. Any electric brake or winch should be powered directly by the battery through a cable with a cross-section of no less than 2.5 mm2. IMPORTANT Electric brakes or other devices must be used with engine running. In addition to the electrical branches, the vehicle's electrical system can be connected only to the supply cable for an electric brake and to the cable for an internal trailer light, though not more than 15 W. For connections, use a preset control unit with battery cable no less than 2.5 mm2. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY IMPORTANT The trailer tow hook contributes to the length of the vehicle. When installing on long wheelbase versions, it is only possible to install removable tow hooks because the total vehicle length limit of 6 metres is exceeded. If no trailer is fitted, the hook must be removed from the attachment base and it must not exceed the vehicle's original length. STARTING AND DRIVING IMPORTANT If you wish to leave the tow hook fitted without towing a trailer, it is advisable to contact a Fiat Dealership for the relevant system update operations because the tow hook could be detected as an obstacle by the central sensors. IN AN EMERGENCY WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 161 Installation diagram for Van versions fig. 164 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 162 The tow hook structure must be fastened in the points shown by the symbol Ø using a total of 6 M10x1.25 screws and 4 M12 screws. The internal back plates must be at least 5 mm thick. MAX LOAD ON BALL: 100/120 kg according to the payload (see “Weights” table in the “Technical data” section). WARNING After fitting, screw holes must be sealed to prevent a exhaust gas inlet. To install a tow hook, the bumpers must be trimmed as described in the supplier's installation kit. Installation diagram for Truck and Chassis Cab versions fig. 165 Another tow hook specific to Truck and Chassis Cab versions in shown in fig. 165. The structure Ø must be fixed in the points indicated using a total of 6 M10x1.25 screws and 4 M12 screws. MAX LOAD ON BALL: 100/120 kg according to the payload (see “Weights” table in the “Technical data” section). WARNING After fitting, the screw holes must be sealed to prevent exhaust gas from entering. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY M12 Existing hole STARTING AND DRIVING M10 (3x) WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES Existing nut IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 164 F0N0189 163 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES Existing hole IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 165 164 F0N0250 SNOW TYRES Any Fiat Dealership will be available to provide advice concerning the most suitable type of tyre for the customer's requirements. The performance of these tyres is considerably reduced when the tread depth is less than 4 mm. Replace them in this case. Due to their specific features, the performance of snow tyres is much lower than that of normal types in normal conditions or long motorway stretches. Their usage should therefore be restricted in accordance with their type approval. IMPORTANT When using snow tyres with a maximum speed index below the one that can be reached by the vehicle (increased by 5%), place a notice in the passenger compartment, plainly in view, which states the maximum speed allowed by the snow tyres (as per EC Directive). All four tyres should be the same (brand and track) to ensure greater safety when driving and braking and good driveability. Remember that you should not change the rotation direction of the tyres. WARNING The maximum speed for snow tyres marked “Q” is 160 km/h, while it is 190 km/h for “T” tyres and 210 km/h for "H" tyres. You should, however, always stick to the speed limits of the highway code. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 165 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES SNOW CHAINS The use of snow chains should be in compliance with local regulations. The snow chains may be applied only onto the front wheel tyres (drive wheels). Use of Lineaccessori Fiat snow chains is recommended. Check the tension of the snow chains after the first few metres have been driven. IMPORTANT With snow chains, use the accelerator with extreme care to prevent, or to limit as much as possible, slipping of the driving wheels that could cause chain breakage resulting in damage to the car body or mechanical components. IMPORTANT Use low-clearance snow chains. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 166 Keep your speed down when snow chains are fitted; do not exceed 50 km/h. Avoid potholes, steps and pavements and avoid driving for long distances on roads not covered with snow to prevent damaging the vehicle and the roadbed. PROLONGED VEHICLE INACTIVITY If the vehicle needs to be off the road for longer than one month, the following precautions must be taken: ❒ park the vehicle indoors in a dry and, if possible, well-ventilated place; ❒ engage a gear; ❒ check that the handbrake is not engaged; ❒ disconnect the negative battery terminal and check the battery charge. Repeat this check once every three months during storage. Recharge if the optical indicator shows a dark colour without the central green area (see "Battery recharging" in the section "Dashboard and controls"); If the vehicle is equipped with a battery disconnection function (disconnector), see the description of the procedure in the "Controls" paragraph in the "Dashboard and controls" section; ❒ clean and protect the painted parts using protective wax; ❒ clean and protect the shiny metal parts using special compounds available commercially; ❒ sprinkle talcum powder on the rubber windscreen and rear window wiper blades and lift them off the glass; ❒ slightly open the windows; ❒ cover the vehicle with a piece of fabric or perforated plastic sheet. Do not use compact plastic tarpaulins, which prevent humidity from evaporating from the surface of the vehicle; ❒ inflate tyres to +0.5 bar above the standard specified pressure and check it at intervals; ❒ if you don’t disconnect the battery from the electric system, check its charge every month and recharge it if the optical indicator shows a dark colour without the central green area; ❒ do not drain the engine cooling system. IMPORTANT If the vehicle is equipped with an alarm system, switch off the vehicle alarm with the remote control. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 167 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 168 The warning light switches on together with (where the instrument panel permits) a specific message and/or acoustic signal. These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained in the Owner Handbook, which you are recommended to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure indication. IMPORTANT The failure indicators appearing on the display are divided into two categories: very serious and less serious faults. Very serious faults are indicated by a repeated and prolonged warning "cycle". Less serious faults are indicated by "warning" cycle with a shorter duration. The warning cycle of both failure categories can be stopped by pressing the button MODE. The instrument panel warning light will stay on until the cause of the failure is eliminated. For messages relevant to the versions equipped with Dualogic gearbox, see the attached Supplement. BRAKE FLUID LOW (red) / HANDBRAKE ENGAGED (red) Turning the key to the MAR-ON position switches on the warning light, but it should switch off after a few seconds. Low brake fluid The warning light comes on when the level of the brake fluid in the reservoir falls below the minimum level due to a possible leak in the circuit. A specific message is displayed on certain versions. WARNING If the warning light turns on when travelling (on certain versions together with the message on the display) stop the vehicle immediately and contact a Fiat Dealership. Handbrake engaged The warning light turns on when the handbrake is engaged. On certain versions, if the vehicle is in motion, the warning light switches on together with an acoustic signal. IMPORTANT If the warning light comes on when the vehicle is in motion, check that the handbrake is not engaged. AIR BAG FAILURE (red) Turning the key to the MAR-ON position switches on the warning light, but it should switch off after a few seconds. The warning light stays on constantly if there is a fault in the air bag system. A specific message is displayed on certain versions. The air bag failure warning light switches on if the passenger bag disabled warning light is faulty. WARNING If the warning light does not switch on when the key is turned to MAR-ON or stays on when driving, there may be a fault with the restraint systems. In this case, the air bags or the pretensioners may not be activated in the case of an accident or (in a lesser number of cases) they may be activated incorrectly. Contact a Fiat Dealership immediately to have the system checked. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 169 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 170 EXCESSIVE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (red) Turning the key to the MAR-ON position switches on the warning light, but it should switch off after a few seconds. The warning light turns on when the engine is overheated. If the warning light switches on, proceed as follows: ❒ When driving normally: stop the car, switch off the engine and check that the coolant level in the reservoir is not below the MIN mark. If it is, wait for the engine to cool down, then slowly and carefully open the reservoir cap. Top up with coolant, making sure that the level of fluid is between the MIN and MAX references on the reservoir. Also check visually for leaks. If, when restarting, the warning light switches on again, contact a Fiat Dealership. ❒ If the vehicle is used under demanding conditions (e.g. towing trailers uphill or fully loaded): slow down and, if the light stays on, stop the vehicle. Wait for 2 or 3 minutes with the engine running and slightly accelerated to further favour the coolant circulation. Then stop the engine. Check correct fluid level in the reservoir as described above. IMPORTANT Under severe use of the car, it is advisable to keep the engine on and slightly accelerated for a few minutes before switching it off. On some versions the display shows the dedicated message. LOW BATTERY CHARGE (red) The warning light switches on when the ignition key is turned to MAR-ON, but it should switch off as soon as the engine has started (with the engine idling, a brief delay before switching off is acceptable). If the warning light stays on, contact a Fiat Dealership immediately. ON CONSTANTLY: INSUFFICIENT ENGINE OIL PRESSURE (red) / FLASHING: ENGINE OIL DETERIORATED (red) (MultiJet versions with DPF only) When the ignition key is turned to MAR-ON, the warning light switches on, but should switch off as soon as the engine has started. 1. Insufficient engine oil pressure The warning light switches on constantly, together with a message (for versions/markets, where provided) on the display, when the system detects that engine oil pressure is too low. WARNING If the warning light turns on when the vehicle is travelling (on certain versions together with the message on the display) stop the engine immediately and contact a Fiat Dealership. 2. Engine oil deteriorated (MultiJet versions with DPF only) The warning light starts to flash together with a message on the display (for versions/markets, where provided) when the system detects that the engine oil has deteriorated. If the warning light flashes, this does not mean that the vehicle is faulty, but simply informs the driver that it is now necessary to change the engine oil as a result of regular vehicle use. If the oil is not changed, when a second deterioration threshold is reached, the warning light also switches on in the instrument panel and the engine operation is limited to 3000 rpm. If the oil is still not changed, when a third deterioration threshold is reached, the engine is limited to 1500 rpm to avoid damage. To avoid damaging the engine it is advisable to change the engine oil when the warning light flashes. Contact a Fiat Dealership. Remember that the deterioration of the engine oil is accelerated by: – mainly town use of the vehicle which makes the DPF regeneration process more frequent – use of the vehicle for short trips, preventing the engine from reaching operating temperature – repeated interruption of the regeneration process, signalled by the DPF warning light coming on. Deteriorated engine oil should be replaced as soon as possible after the warning light comes on, and never more than 500 km after it first switches on. Failure to observe the above may result in severe damage to the engine and invalidate the warranty. Remember that the operation of this warning light is not related to the amount of oil in the engine. Therefore, never top up with oil when the light starts flashing. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 171 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING INCOMPLETE DOOR/LOAD COMPARTMENT CLOSURE (red) On certain versions the warning switches turns on when one or more doors or the load compartment are not completely shut. On some versions, the display shows a dedicated message that indicates left/right front door or rear/load compartment door opening. An acoustic signal is emitted with the doors open and the vehicle in motion. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES SEAT BELTS NOT FASTENED (red) IN AN EMERGENCY The warning light on the panel will switch on constantly when the vehicle is moving and the driver's seat belt is not correctly fastened. The warning light will flash and a buzzer will sound if the front seat belts are not correctly fastened with the vehicle in motion. The SBR (Seat Belt Reminder) system's buzzer can be disabled only by a Fiat Dealership. On some versions the system can be reactivated from the setup menu. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 172 EBD FAILURE (red) (amber) Simultaneous switching on of the and warning lights while the engine is running indicates an EBD system fault or non-availability of the system. Early locking of the rear wheels may occur in the event of violent braking causing the vehicle to swerve. Drive very carefully to a Fiat Dealership to have the system inspected immediately. A specific message is displayed on certain versions. INJECTION SYSTEM FAILURE (amber) In normal conditions, when the ignition key is turned to MAR-ON, the warning light switches on, but should switch off when the engine starts. The warning light staying on or switching on when travelling signals malfunction in the injection system which could cause possible lack of performance, poor handling and high consumption levels. A specific message is displayed on certain versions. Under these conditions, you may continue travelling at a moderate speed without demanding excessive effort from the engine. In any case, you should go to a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG DEACTIVATED (amber) (for versions/markets, where provided) The warning light switches on when the front passenger air bag is deactivated. With the front passenger air bag enabled, when the ignition key is turned to MAR-ON, the warning light switches on constantly for about 4 seconds then switches off. If the warning light flashes to report a failure of the warning light , the passenger's protection is deactivated for markets where passenger air bag deactivation is available, otherwise it remains on. ABS SYSTEM FAILURE (amber) KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Turning the key to the MAR-ON position switches on the warning light, but it should switch off after a few seconds. The warning light will switch on when the system is either not working or not available. In this case the braking system maintains its own unaltered efficiency but without the extra capacity of the ABS system. Drive carefully and contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. A specific message is displayed on certain versions. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES FUEL RESERVE (amber) WARNING Warning light indicates fault of warning light .This condition is indicated by intermittent flashing of warning light for more than 4 seconds. In this case, the warning light may not indicate a fault in the restraint systems. Contact a Fiat Dealership immediately to have the system checked. SAFETY IN AN EMERGENCY When the key is turned to MAR-ON, the warning light switches on, but it should switch off after a few seconds. The warning light switches on when there are about 10-12 litres of fuel (for versions with tank capacity 90-120 l) or 10 l (for versions with tank capacity 60 l) remaining in the tank. IMPORTANT The warning light will blink to indicate a system fault. If this is the case, go to a Fiat Dealership to have the system checked. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 173 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE GLOW PLUG HEATING/GLOW PLUG HEATING FAILURE (amber) Glow plug heating SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES This warning light switches on when the key is turned to MAR-ON. It will switch off as soon as the glow plugs have reached a preset temperature. Start the engine as soon as the warning light switches off. IMPORTANT At high ambient temperatures the warning light may stay on for an extremely short time. Glow plug heating failure IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 174 The warning light flashes if there is a fault in the preheating system. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. A specific message is displayed on certain versions. WATER IN DIESEL FILTER (amber) Turning the key to the MAR-ON position switches on the warning light, but it should switch off after a few seconds. The warning light switches on when there is water in the diesel filter. A specific message is displayed on certain versions. The presence of water in the supply circuit may cause severe damage to the injection system and irregular engine operation. If the warning light switches on (on some versions together with the dedicated message on the display), contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible to have the system bled. If the above indications come on immediately after refuelling, water has probably entered the tank: turn the engine off immediately and contact a Fiat Dealership. FIAT CODE VEHICLE PROTECTION SYSTEM FAILURE (amber) When the key is turned to MAR-ON, the warning light should flash once and then switch off. When the warning light comes on constantly, with key in MAR-ON, this indicates: ❒ a potential failure (refer to "The Fiat CODE system" in the chapter "Know your vehicle"). ❒ a possible break-in attempt with an alarm; in this case the warning light switches after approximately 10 seconds. If, with the engine running, the warning light flashes, the vehicle is not protected by the engine inhibitor device (see “Fiat Code system” in chapter “Know your vehicle”). Contact a Fiat Dealership to have all the keys stored in the memory. EXTERNAL LIGHT FAILURE (amber) The warning light will come on (some versions only) when a fault to one of the following lights is detected: ❒ side lights ❒ brake lights ❒ rear fog lights ❒ direction indicators ❒ reversing lights. The fault relating to these lights could be: one or more blown bulbs, a blown protection fuse or a break in the electrical connection. A specific message is displayed on certain versions. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY REAR FOG LIGHTS (amber) STARTING AND DRIVING The warning light switches on when the rear fog lights are activated. GENERIC FAILURE INDICATION (amber) WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY The warning light switches on in the following circumstances: Engine oil pressure sensor failure The warning light switches on when the engine oil pressure sensor is incorrect. Contact a Fiat Dealership to have the fault fixed as soon as possible. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Fuel cut-off inertia switch tripped The warning light switches on when the fuel cut-off inertia switch is triggered. INDEX 175 The display shows a dedicated message. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY Rain sensor failure The warning light switches on when a rain sensor fault is detected. Contact a Fiat Dealership. The display shows a dedicated message. Parking sensor failure STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 176 See description for warning light . Daytime running light failure (with multifunction display) The warning light comes on when a daylight fault is detected. The display shows a dedicated message. DPF (PARTICULATE FILTER) CLEANING IN PROGRESS (amber) (for versions/markets, where provided) Turning the key to the MAR-ON position switches on the warning light, but it should switch off after a few seconds. The warning light switches on constantly to inform the driver that the DPF system needs to eliminate the trapped pollutants (particulate) through the regeneration process. The warning light does not come on during every DPF regeneration, but only when driving conditions require that the driver is notified. The warning light will go off if the vehicle stays in motion until regeneration has been completed. As an average, the process lasts fifteen minutes. The best conditions to complete the regeneration process are reached by driving the vehicle at about 60 km/h with engine speed above 2000 rpm. When this warning light comes on, it does not indicate a vehicle failure and it should not therefore be taken to a workshop. A specific message will appear on the display when the warning light comes on (for versions/markets, where provided). During regeneration, the fan could be operated. WARNING The driving speed should always be suitable to traffic conditions, weather conditions and the driver should always comply with the Highway Code.The engine may be stopped the DPF light is on; however, repeated interruption of the regeneration process may result in premature deterioration of the engine oil. For this reason, always wait until the warning light switches off before stopping the engine as described above. It is not advisable to complete DPF regeneration with the vehicle stationary. ESP-ASR SYSTEM / TRACTION PLUS FAILURE (amber) - HILL HOLDER FAILURE (amber) (for versions/markets, where provided) BRAKE PAD WEAR (amber) KNOW YOUR VEHICLE This warning light switches on when the ignition key is turned to MAR-ON, but it should switch off after a few seconds. The warning light switches on if the front brake pads are worn. In this case replace them as soon as possible. A dedicated message is displayed on certain versions. ESP-ASR system/TRACTION PLUS warning light PARKING SENSOR FAILURE (amber) If the warning light does not go off or stays on together with the LED on the ASR button when travelling, contact a Fiat Dealership. A dedicated message is displayed on certain versions. Note Flashing of the warning light while driving indicates the action of the ESP system. Hill Holder system failure The warning light will turn on when the Hill Holder system is faulty. In this case, contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. A dedicated message is displayed on certain versions. (for versions/markets, where provided) The warning light switches on when a fault is detected in the parking sensors. On certain versions, warning light switches on instead. In this case, contact a Fiat Dealership. A dedicated message is displayed on certain versions. SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 177 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS (green) - FOLLOW ME HOME (green) Dipped beam headlights SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES The warning light switches on when the dipped beam headlights are switched on. Follow me home The warning light switches on when this device is active (see “Follow me home” in chapter “Know your vehicle”). The display shows a dedicated message. FOG LIGHTS (green) IN AN EMERGENCY The warning light switches on when the front fog lights are turned on. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 178 LEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR (green - intermittent) The light comes on when the direction indicator control stalk is moved downwards or, together with the right-hand indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pressed. RIGHT DIRECTION INDICATOR (green - intermittent) The warning light switches on when the direction indicator control lever is moved upwards or, together with the left indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pressed. CRUISE CONTROL (green) (for versions/markets, where provided) This warning light switches on when the ignition key is turned to MAR-ON, but it should switch off after a few seconds. The warning light on the panel switches on when the Cruise Control ring nut is turned to ON. On certain versions a dedicated message is displayed. MAIN BEAMS (blue) The warning light switches on when the main beams are turned on. POWER STEERING FAILURE (red) When the ignition key is turned to MAR-ON the warning light on the panel switches on, but it should switch off after a few seconds. If the warning light stays on together with the message shown on the display and an acoustic signal, the power steering is ineffective and the effort on the steering wheel increases significantly even though the vehicle can be steered. Contact a Fiat Dealership. SELF-LEVELLING SUSPENSION FAILURE (red) AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FAILURE/ TRANSMISSION OIL MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE (red) (for versions/markets, where provided) This warning light on the panel switches on when the ignition key is turned to MAR-ON, but it should switch off after a few seconds. The warning light on the panel begins to flash (together with a message in the display and a acoustic signal) to indicate that the gearbox is faulty. The warning light on the panel switches on constantly (together with the display of the message and an acoustic signal) to indicate that the automatic transmission oil temperature is too high. POSSIBLE ICE ON ROAD (for versions/markets, where provided) This warning light switches on when the ignition key is turned to MAR-ON, but it should switch off after a few seconds. The warning light switches on when a fault is present in the self-levelling suspension system. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE This indication starts flashing when the outside temperature reaches or falls below 3°C to warn the driver of the possible presence of ice on the road. The display will show the dedicated message (only for versions with a multifunction display). LIMITED RANGE The display shows a dedicated message to warn the driver that the vehicle's range is less than 50 km. SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 179 SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 180 The display shows the dedicated message when the vehicle exceeds the set speed limit (see “Multifunction Display” in chapter “Know your vehicle”). SCHEDULED SERVICING (for versions/markets, where provided) The display shows the dedicated message next to the scheduled servicing warning and stays on until the service deadline is reached. The warning light goes off after the service has been carried out at a Fiat Dealership or once 1000 km have been covered at the service deadline. DAYLIGHT FAILURE (with reconfigurable multifunction display) The display shows the dedicated message together with the external light failure icon when daytime running light failure is detected. IN AN EMERGENCY KNOW YOUR VEHICLE In an emergency, we recommend that you call the freephone number found in the Warranty Booklet.You can also go to the www.fiat.com website to find your nearest Fiat Dealership. STARTING THE ENGINE Contact to a Fiat Dealership immediately if instrument panel warning light comes on constantly. JUMP STARTING If the battery is flat, the engine may be started using an auxiliary battery with the same capacity or a little higher than the flat one. It is advisable to contact a Fiat Dealership to check/replace the battery. Proceed as follows to start the car: ❒ raise the flap A fig. 166 to gain access to the positive battery terminal. ❒ connect the positive terminals (sign + near the terminal) of the two batteries with a jump lead; ❒ use a second cable to connect the negative terminal (–) of the auxiliary battery to the earth point as shown in fig. 167; ❒ start the engine; ❒ when the engine has been started, remove the leads reversing the order above. SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY WARNING SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE This procedure must be performed by expert personnel because incorrect actions could cause electrical discharge of considerable intensity. Furthermore, battery fluid is poisonous and corrosive: avoid contact with skin and eyes. Keep naked flames and lighted cigarettes away from the battery and do not cause sparks. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 166 F0N0075 181 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES If after a few attempts the engine does not start, do not keep trying but contact a Fiat Dealership. IMPORTANT Do not directly connect the negative terminals of the two batteries: sparks could ignite explosive gas released from the battery. If the auxiliary battery is installed on another vehicle, avoid any metal parts on the latter and the vehicle with the flat battery from accidentally coming into contact. BUMP STARTING Never bump start the engine by pushing, towing or driving downhill. This could cause fuel to flow into the catalytic converter and damage it beyond repair. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 182 fig. 167 F0N0076 IMPORTANT Remember that the brake servo and electrical power steering system are not active until the engine is started. A much greater effort will therefore be required to use the brake pedal or turn the steering wheel. REPLACING A WHEEL GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Wheel changing and correct use of the jack and spare wheel (for versions/markets, where provided) call for some precautions, which are listed below. WARNING Indicate that the vehicle is stationary according to the regulations in force: emergency lights, refracting warning triangle, etc. Passengers should leave the vehicle, particularly if it is very loaded, and wait for the wheel to be changed away from on-coming traffic. Apply the handbrake. WARNING Repair and refit the standard wheel as soon as possible. Do not grease the threads of bolts before fitting them: they might slip out. SAFETY WARNING Use the jack only to replace wheels on the vehicle with which it is supplied or on other vehicles of the same model. Never use the jack for other purposes, such as lifting other car models. Never use the jack to carry out repairs under the vehicle. Incorrect positioning of the jack may cause the lifted vehicle to fall. Do not use the jack for loads higher than those shown on the label. WARNING The spare wheel supplied (for versions/markets, where provided) is specific for your vehicle.Therefore, it must not be used on other models. Do not use spare wheels of other models on your vehicle.The wheel bolts are specific for your vehicle: do not use them on different models and do not use bolts from other models on your car. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Never tamper with the inflating valve. Never introduce tools of any kind between rim and tyre. Check tyre and spare wheel pressure regularly, referring to the values shown in the "Technical specifications" section. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 183 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES Please note that: ❒ the jack weight is 4.5 kg; ❒ the jack requires no adjustment; ❒ the jack cannot be repaired: in the event of a fault it must be replaced by another original one; ❒ no tool other than its cranking device may be fitted on the jack. WARNING No tools other than the crank provided should be used with the spare wheel lifting device; it should be operated by hand only. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 184 fig. 168 F0N0193 To change a wheel proceed as follows: ❒ stop the vehicle in a position that is not dangerous for oncoming traffic where you can change the wheel safely. The ground must be flat and sufficiently compact; ❒ turn the engine off and pull up the hand-brake; ❒ engage first gear or reverse; ❒ put on the reflective safety jacket (compulsory by law in certain countries) before getting out of the vehicle; ❒ indicate that the vehicle has broken down using the devices required by the law in the current country (e.g. warning triangle, hazard lights, etc.); ❒ take the extension arm and the wrench from the tool kit under the passenger seat (see “Compartment under front passenger seat” in the “Know your vehicle” section); ❒ for versions with alloy rims, remove the press-fitted hub cap; ❒ loosen the bolts on the wheel to be replaced by one turn; ❒ turn the wheel to extend the jack partly; ❒ arrange the jack near the lift support closest to the wheel to be replaced at the points shown in fig. 168. For short wheelbase versions with retractable footboard, the jack must be positioned at the lift point shown in fig. 169 aligned (45°) so that it does not interfere with the retractable footboard; ❒ warn all bystanders that the vehicle is about to be lifted. They must stay clear and not touch the vehicle until it is back on the ground. ❒ for versions equipped with self-levelling air suspension, before raising the vehicle with the jack, press buttons A and B fig. 170 simultaneously for at least 5 seconds. The operating mode for raising the vehicle is activated: the LEDs on the buttons come on constantly. To exit this mode, press buttons A and B simultaneously for another 5 seconds; both LEDs on the buttons will go out and full system operation will be restored. This mode deactivates automatically when the speed of approx. 5 km/h is exceeded. WARNING On versions equipped with self-levelling air suspension, never introduce the head or hands in the wheel arch: the vehicle could raise or lower automatically depending on possible load or temperature changes. ❒ lift the vehicle. After lifting the vehicle: ❒ for all versions, when gaining access through the vehicle's right rear wheel arch, adjust the screw A fig. 171 for the wheel retaining device, using the wrench provided with the extension/adaptor B; KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 169 F0N0194 fig. 170 F0N0677 185 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ❒ turn wrench C fig. 172 anticlockwise 1 to allow the lowering of the spare wheel; ❒ continue turning anticlockwise until the stop point, indicated by the stiffening of the manoeuvre or a click from the clutch present in the device; SAFETY WARNING The device should only be operated by hand, without using any type of tool other than the crank provided, like pneumatic or electrical screwers. ❒ use the wheel dismantling spanner to remove the wheel from the vehicle fig. 173; ❒ unscrew the retaining knob D fig. 174 and release the wheel releasing the support E. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY fig. 171 F0N0835 fig. 172 F0N0836 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 186 fig. 173 F0N0165 WARNING The moving components of the jack (screws and joints) can also cause injuries: avoid touching them. If you come into contact with lubricating grease, clean yourself thoroughly. ❒ use the wheel removal wrench to lower the vehicle and remove the jack; ❒ fully tighten the bolts, passing alternately from one bolt to the one diametrically opposite, following the order illustrated in fig. 176. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY ❒ use wrench F fig. 175 to completely unscrew the bolts and remove the wheel; ❒ fit the spare wheel, aligning holes G fig. 176 with the pins H. When fitting the spare wheel, ensure that the wheel support surfaces are clean and free of impurities that could subsequently cause the bolts to loosen; ❒ screw in the 5 fastening bolts; STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES fig. 175 F0N0167 IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 174 F0N0370 fig. 176 F0N0168 187 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE At the end of the operation: ❒ take the removed wheel, re-attach to the mount E fig. 174 and tighten the knob D; ❒ introduce the supplied wrench C fig. 172 with the suitable extension B fig. 171 on the screw A fig. 171 of the spare wheel housing manoeuvring device and turn clockwise 2 to lift the spare wheel back up until it is fully supported in its housing beneath the floor pan, checking that the attachment reference D fig. 172 appears in the window on the device. WARNING At the end of the operation of raising/locking the spare wheel, the wrench must be extracted, taking care not to turn it in the wrong direction to facilitate the extraction of the wrench itself, to prevent the attachment device from being released and the wheel assembly not being securely retained fig. 177. For vehicles with alloy rims, proceed as follows: ❒ take the kit from the tool box; ❒ fit the appropriate plate A fig. 178 on the alloy wheel and fix it with the screws supplied B, using the wrench provided; ❒ re-attach the wheel to the support, rotating it to the end of the slot (as illustrated in fig. 179) and screw in knob D; ❒ introduce the supplied wrench C fig. 172 with the suitable extension B fig. 171 on the screw A fig. 171 of the spare wheel housing manoeuvring device and turn clockwise 2 to lift the spare wheel back up until it is fully supported in its housing beneath the floor pan, checking that the attachment reference D fig. 172 appears in the window on the device. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 188 fig. 177 F0N0837 ❒ Check the correct position of the replaced wheel under the floor (the lifting system is supplied with a clutch to limit the end of the stroke). Incorrect positioning may jeopardise safety; ❒ place the removal wrench back in the tool box; ❒ place the tool box in its housing under the passenger seat. WARNING Each time the spare wheel is moved, check that it is correctly positioned in its housing under the floor. If it is not correctly positioned, this could adversely affect safety. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 178 F0N0251 fig. 179 F0N0371 189 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY AUTOMATIC FIX & GO QUICK TYRE REPAIR KIT (for versions/markets, where provided) The Fix & Go automatic tyre repair kit is positioned at the front of the vehicle passenger compartment and includes fig. 180: ❒ bottle A containing sealer and fitted with: – a transparent filler pipe B; – a black pressure restoring pipe E; – an adhesive label C with the message “max. 80 km/h” to be applied in a position clearly visible by the driver (on the instrument panel) after repairing the tyre; ❒ instruction brochure (see fig. 181), to be used for prompt and correct use of the quick repair kit and then to be handed to the personnel charged with handling the tyre treated with the tyre repair kit; ❒ a compressor D complete with pressure gauge and connectors; ❒ a pair of protective gloves located in the side compartment of the compressor; ❒ adapters for inflating different elements. WARNING Give the instruction booklet to the personnel charged with handling the treated tyre. In the event of a puncture caused by foreign bodies, the kit may be used to repair tyres showing damages on the track or shoulder up to max 4 mm diameter. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS E INDEX 190 fig. 180 F0N0825 fig. 181 F0N0178 WARNING Holes and damage on the tyre side walls cannot be repaired. Do not use the quick tyre repair kit if the damage is due to running with flat tyre. Replace the cylinder if the sealing fluid has expired. Dispose of the bottle and the sealant liquid properly. Have the sealing fluid and the cylinder disposed of in compliance with national and local regulations. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY WARNING WARNING Repairs are not possible in the case of damage to the wheel rim (bad groove distortion causing air loss). Do not remove the foreign body (screw or nail) from the tyre. IMPORTANT INFORMATION: The sealing fluid of the quick tyre repair kit is effective at external temperatures of between -20 °C and +50 °C. The sealing fluid has an expiration date. WARNING Do not operate the compressor for longer than 20 consecutive minutes. Risk of overheating.Tyres repaired with the quick tyre repair kit must only be used temporarily. The cylinder contains ethyl glycol. Contains latex: may cause an allergic reaction. Harmful if swallowed. Eye irritant. May cause irritation if inhaled or on contact. Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes. In the event of contact, wash immediately with plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting if swallowed. Rinse your mouth and drink plenty of water. Call a doctor immediately. Keep away from children.The product must not be used by asthmatics. Do not breathe in the vapours during insertion and suction. Call a doctor immediately if allergic reactions are noted. Store the canister in its proper compartment, away from sources of heat.The sealing fluid has an expiration date. Replace the cylinder if the sealing fluid has expired. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 191 INFLATION PROCEDURE KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY WARNING Put on the protective gloves provided together with quick tyre repair kit. ❒ Pull up the handbrake. Unscrew the tyre valve cap, take out the flexible filler pipe A fig. 182 and tighten the ring nut B on the tyre valve; ❒ insert the plug E fig. 184 in the nearest 12 V power socket and start the engine. Turn the selector D fig. 183 anticlockwise to the repair position. Activate the kit by pressing the on/off switch. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in the "Inflation pressure" paragraph, in the "Technical Data" chapter; For a more accurate reading, it is advisable to check the pressure reading on the pressure gauge F fig. 183 with the compressor off and without moving the centre selector from the repair position; ❒ if after 10 minutes it is still impossible to reach at least 3 bar, release the transparent filler pipe from the valve and take out the 12 V plug, then move the vehicle forwards by about 10 metres in order to distribute the sealing fluid inside the tyre evenly, then repeat the inflation operation; ❒ if after this operation you still cannot reach at least 3 bar after 10 minutes, do not resume driving because the tyre is too damaged and the quick tyre repair kit cannot guarantee suitable sealing. Contact a Fiat Dealership; ❒ if the tyre reaches the pressure specified in “Inflation pressure” paragraph in the "Technical Data" section, start driving immediately; SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 192 fig. 182 F0N0826 fig. 183 F0N0827 WARNING WARNING Apply the adhesive label in a position clearly visible by the driver as a reminder that the tyre has been treated with the quick repair kit. Drive carefully, particularly on bends. Do not exceed 80 km/h. Do not accelerate or brake suddenly. ❒ after driving for about 10 minutes stop and check the tyre pressure again; remember to operate the handbrake; If the pressure falls below 3 bars, do not drive any further: the quick tyre repair kit Fix & Go automatic cannot guarantee adequate hold because the tyre is too damaged. Contact a Fiat Dealership. ❒ if a pressure value of at least 3 bar is detected, restore the correct pressure prescribed in the paragraph “Inflation pressure” in “Technical specification” (with the engine running and the handbrake engaged), resume driving and drive with care to nearest Fiat Dealership. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES WARNING Inform the dealership that the tyre has been repaired using the quick tyre repair kit. Give the instruction booklet to the personnel charged with handling the treated tyre. WARNING If different tyres from the ones supplied with the vehicle are used, it may not be possible to carry out the repair. If the tyres are replaced, it is advisable to use those approved by the manufacturer. Consult a Fiat Dealership. fig. 184 IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX F0N0182 193 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY FOR CHECKING AND RESTORING PRESSURE ONLY The compressor may also be used for restoring pressure only. ❒ Pull up the handbrake. ❒ Undo the cap for the tyre valve, extract the pipe C fig. 185 with the quick connector and connect it directly to the valve of the tyre to be inflated. ❒ Insert the plug in the nearest 12 V power socket and start the engine. ❒ Rotate the selector clockwise to the pressure renewal position. ❒ Activate the kit by pressing the on/off switch. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in the "Inflation pressure" paragraph, in the "Technical Data" chapter. NOTE If the tyre has to be deflated, press the dedicated button B illustrated in fig. 186. For a more accurate reading, it is advisable to check the pressure reading on the pressure gauge with the compressor off and without moving the centre selector from the pressure renewal position. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE B TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 194 fig. 185 F0N0828 fig. 186 F0N0830 CYLINDER REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE To replace the bottle, proceed as follows: ❒ press button A fig. 187 to release the part; ❒ fit the new cylinder and press until it is automatically engaged. CHANGING A BULB GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS ❒ When a light is not working, check that the corresponding fuse is intact before changing a bulb. For the location of fuses, refer to the paragraph "Replacing fuses" in this chapter. ❒ before changing a bulb check the contacts for oxidation; ❒ burnt bulbs must be replaced by others of the same type and power; ❒ always check the headlight beam direction after changing a bulb; Halogen bulbs must be handled holding the metal part only.Touching the transparent part of the bulb with your fingers may reduce the intensity of the emitted light and even reduce the lifespan of the bulb. In case of accidental contact, wipe the bulb with a cloth moistened with alcohol and let the bulb dry. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 187 F0N0829 195 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 196 WARNING Modifications or repairs to the electric system that are not carried out properly or do not take the system technical specifications into account can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire. WARNING Halogen bulbs contain pressurised gas, in the case of breakage they may burst. IMPORTANT A slight misting may appear on the internal surface of the headlight: this does not indicate a fault and is caused by low temperature and the degree of humidity in the air. Misting will rapidly disappear when the headlights are switched on. The presence of drops inside the headlights indicates infiltration of water. Contact a Fiat Dealership. TYPES OF BULBS Various types of bulbs are fitted to your car: KNOW YOUR VEHICLE All-glass bulbs: (type A) press-fitted. Pull to remove. SAFETY Bayonet type bulbs: (type B) to remove them press the bulb and turn it anticlockwise. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES Tubular bulbs: (type C) release them from their contacts to remove. Halogen bulbs: (type D) to remove the bulb, release the clip holding the bulb in place. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Halogen bulbs: (type E) to remove the bulb, release the clip holding the bulb in place. INDEX 197 Bulbs KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY Bulbs Type Power Figure ref. Main beam headlamps H1 55W D Dipped headlights/daytime running lights (*) H15 15/55W D Dipped headlights H7 55W D W5W 5W A H1 55W - Front direction indicators PY21W 21W B Side direction indicators W16WF(**) / WY5W (***) 16W (**) / 5W (***) A Rear direction indicators P2IW 21 W B Side lights W5W 5W A Rear side lights R10W 10 W B Brake lights P21W 21 W B 3rd brake light P21W 21W B Reverse P21W 21W - Rear fog light / Maxi Van rear fog light P21W 21W - Number plate C5W 5W A Front roof light (movable lens) 12V10W 10W C Rear roof light 12V10W 10W C Front side lights STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 198 Fog lights(*) (*)for versions/markets, where provided (**)XL and recreational versions (***)all other versions REPLACING EXTERIOR BULBS For the type of bulb and relative power rating, see the previous paragraph, “Changing a bulb”. FRONT LIGHT CLUSTERS The front light clusters contain side lights, dipped beam, main beam and direction indicator bulbs. The bulbs are arranged inside the light cluster as follows fig. 188: A direction indicators B side lights/dipped headlights (double light) C main beam headlights/daytime running lights To replace a bulb of the main beam headlights/ daytime running lights, remove cap C fig. 189. To replace a bulb of the dipped headlights/side lights, remove cap B fig. 189. To replace the direction indicator bulb, remove bulb holder A fig. 189. After replacement, refit the covers correctly, ensuring that they are locked in place. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 188 F0N0079 fig. 189 F0N0080 199 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING SIDE LIGHTS MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS To replace the bulb, proceed as follows: ❒ remove protective cover B fig. 189, rotating anticlockwise; ❒ remove snap-fitted bulb holder A fig. 190, remove bulb B and replace it; ❒ refit the snap-fitted bulb holder A fig. 190; ❒ refit the protective cover B fig. 189, turning it clockwise and making sure that it locks correctly. To replace the bulb, proceed as follows: ❒ remove protective cover C fig. 189, rotating it anticlockwise; ❒ disconnect electrical connector A fig. 191; release bulb holder catch B; ❒ remove the bulb C and replace it; ❒ fit the new bulb, ensuring that the outline of the metal part coincides with the grooves on the curve of the headlight, re-attach catch B and reconnect connector A; ❒ refit the protective cover C fig. 189, turning it clockwise and making sure that it locks correctly. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 200 fig. 190 F0N0082 fig. 191 F0N0083 MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS/DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (for versions/markets, where provided) DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS To change the bulb, proceed as follows: ❒ remove protective cover C fig. 189, rotating it anticlockwise; ❒ disconnect the electrical connector A fig. 192; ❒ rotate bulb holder B fig. 192 anticlockwise and remove the unit; ❒ remove the bulb C and replace it; ❒ refit the bulb holder B and rotate it clockwise to lock; ❒ reconnect the electrical connector A; ❒ refit the protective cover by turning it clockwise making sure to lock it correctly. To replace the bulb, proceed as follows: ❒ remove protective cover B fig. 189, rotating it anticlockwise; ❒ disconnect the electrical connector A fig. 193; ❒ release bulb holder catch B; ❒ remove the bulb C and replace it; ❒ fit the new bulb, ensuring that the outline of the metal part coincides with the grooves on the curve of the headlight, re-attach catch B and reconnect connector A; ❒ refit the protective cover by turning it clockwise making sure to lock it correctly. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE With incandescent bulbs SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 192 F0N0517 fig. 193 F0N0084 201 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING DIRECTION INDICATORS Side fig. 195 To replace the bulb, proceed as follows: ❒ turn bulb holder A fig. 194 anticlockwise and remove it; ❒ remove the bulb by pushing it slightly and turning it anticlockwise (bayonet mount); ❒ replace the bulb; ❒ refit the bulb holder, turning it clockwise and making sure that it locks correctly. To change the bulb, proceed as follows: ❒ move the mirror manually to permit access to the two fixing screws A; ❒ using the Phillips screwdriver provided, undo the screws and extract the bulb holder assembly, releasing it from the teeth; ❒ undo the bulb and replace bulb B, turning it anticlockwise. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 202 fig. 194 F0N0081 fig. 195 F0N0520 REAR LIGHT CLUSTERS FOG LIGHTS (for versions/markets, where provided) To replace the front fog light bulbs A fig. 196, proceed as follows: ❒ turn the steering wheel completely to the left; ❒ open the flap on the front wheel arch, undoing the self-tapping screw; ❒ remove the bayonet cap and disconnect the connector; ❒ release the bulb holder catch; remove the bulb and replace it ❒ fit the new bulb, ensuring that the outline of the metal part coincides with the grooves on the curve of the headlight, re-attach the catch and reconnect the electrical connector; ❒ refit the bayonet cap. The bulbs are arranged inside the light cluster as follows fig. 197: A brake/side lights B direction indicators C reverse lights D rear fog lights (for Max Van versions, the rear fog lights are integral with the bumpers, see paragraph “Maxi Van rear fog lights”). KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 196 F0N0339 fig. 197 F0N0850 203 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES To change a bulb, proceed as follows fig. 198: ❒ open the rear swing door and then undo the two fixing screws A; ❒ disconnect the central electric connector B and pull the lens unit outwards; ❒ unscrew the screws C fig. 199 using the screwdriver provided and remove the bulb holder; ❒ remove the bulb D, E, F, G pushing it gently and turning it anticlockwise (“bayonet” locking), then replace it; ❒ refit the bulb holder and tighten the screws C; ❒ reconnect the electrical connector B, correctly reposition the unit on the body of the vehicle and then tighten the fixing screws A. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 204 fig. 198 F0N0851 fig. 199 F0N0088 For truck and chassis cab versions: Undo the four screws H fig. 200 and replace the bulbs: I bulb for rear fog light L bulb for reversing light M bulb for side light N bulb for brake light O bulb for direction indicator. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE REAR FOG LIGHTS (Maxi Van) To change the bulb proceed as follows: ❒ take up position at the rear of the side bumper; ❒ unscrew lower fastening A between central and side bumper fig. 201 ; ❒ after removing the rear light cluster, unscrew upper fastening B; ❒ unscrew both fastenings C fig. 202 on the side of the rear swing door, accessible by opening the door slightly; SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 200 F0N0881 fig. 201 F0N0241 205 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING ❒ unscrew the three side fastenings D on the side of the panel, accessible after removing the side moulding fig. 202. To remove the moulding, unscrew the three lower self-tapping screws and detach the pins carefully to avoid breaking them. If one or more pins are broken, they will have to be replaced; ❒ extract the bulb holder assembly; ❒ turn bulb holder E anticlockwise (1/8 of a turn), remove the bayonet-fitted bulb by pushing gently and turning anticlockwise, then replace it fig. 203. THIRD BRAKE LIGHTS To change the bulb proceed as follows: ❒ undo the two fixing screws fig. 204; ❒ extract the lens unit; WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY fig. 203 F0N0243 fig. 204 F0N0141 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 206 fig. 202 F0N0242 ❒ press in the tabs B fig. 205 and remove the bulb holder; ❒ remove the snap-fitted bulb and replace. NUMBER PLATE LIGHTS To change the bulb proceed as follows: ❒ operate in the point indicated by the arrow and remove the lens unit A fig. 206; ❒ change the bulb releasing it from the side contacts and making sure the new bulb is correctly fastened between the contacts; ❒ refit the snap-fitted lens unit. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 205 F0N0142 fig. 206 F0N0089 207 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES REPLACING INTERIOR BULBS SIDE LIGHTS (for versions/markets, where provided) To change the bulb proceed as follows: ❒ for extra-long van: – undo the two fixing screws C fig. 207 and remove the light cluster; – remove the bulb holder D on the rear of the light cluster, turning it through a 1/4 turn; – remove the snap-fitted bulb and replace. ❒ for chassis cabs with platform: – remove the bulb holder on the rear of the light cluster, turning it through a 1/4 turn; – remove the snap-fitted bulb and replace. For the type of bulb and corresponding power rating, see the paragraph “Changing a bulb”. FRONT ROOF LIGHT Proceed as follows to replace the bulbs: ❒ operate in the points indicated by the arrows and remove light A fig. 208; ❒ open protective flap B fig. 209; ❒ replace the bulbs C fig. 209, releasing them from the side contacts and making sure that the new bulbs are correctly secured between the contacts; ❒ close flap B fig. 209 and fix roof light A fig. 208 in its housing, making sure that it locks into place. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 208 fig. 207 F0N0244 fig. 208 F0N0090 REAR ROOF LIGHT KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Proceed as follows to replace the bulbs: ❒ operate in the points indicated by the arrows and remove roof light D fig. 210 ; ❒ open protective flap E fig. 211; ❒ replace bulb F fig. 211, releasing it from the side contacts and making sure that the new bulb is correctly locked between these contacts; ❒ close protective flap E fig. 211 and refit roof light D fig. 210 in its housing, making sure that it locks into place. SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES fig. 210 F0N0092 IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 209 F0N0091 fig. 211 F0N0093 209 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES REPLACING FUSES WARNING GENERAL INFORMATION Fuses protect the electrical system: they intervene (blow) in the event of a failure or improper intervention on the system. When a device does not work, check the condition of its fuse: the conductor element A fig. 212 must be intact. If it is not, replace the blown fuse with another with the same amperage (same colour). B undamaged fuse. C fuse with damaged filament. Never replace a fuse with metal wires or anything else. IN AN EMERGENCY WARNING Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition key has been removed and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged. WARNING If the replaced fuse blows again, contact a Fiat Dealership. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE WARNING If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, transmission system) or steering system is triggered, contact a Fiat Dealership. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 210 Never replace a fuse with another with a higher amp rating; DANGER OF FIRE. If a general protection fuse (MEGA-FUSE, MIDI-FUSE) is activated, contact a Fiat Dealership. fig. 212 F0N0094 FUSE LOCATION The vehicle fuses are grouped in three control units, located on the dashboard, passenger compartment right pillar and engine compartment. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Fuse box on the dashboard SAFETY To access the dashboard fuse box, fig. 214 loosen the screws A fig. 213 and remove the cover. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 213 F0N0095 fig. 214 F0N0853 211 Engine compartment fuse box KNOW YOUR VEHICLE To gain access to the fuse box, fig. 216, remove the protective cover fig. 215. SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 212 fig. 215 F0N0098 fig. 216 F0N0854 Right central pillar optional fuse box (for versions/markets, where provided) KNOW YOUR VEHICLE To gain access to the fuse box, fig. 218, remove the protective cover fig. 217. SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 217 F0N0172 fig. 218 F0N0855 213 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 214 Dashboard fuse box fig. 213 - fig. 214 DEVICE PROTECTED FUSE AMPS Right dipped headlamp F12 7,5 Left dipped headlight F13 7,5 Engine compartment control unit relay, instrument panel control unit relay (+key) F31 5 Lighting of roof lights in the passenger compartment (+battery) F32 7,5 Battery monitoring sensor for Start&Stop versions (+battery) F33 10 Minibus interior lights (emergency) F34 5 Radio, climate control, alarm, tachograph, battery disconnecting unit, Webasto timer (+battery) F36 20 Brake light control (main), third brake light, instrument panel (+key) F37 15 Door lock (+battery) F38 20 ABS, ASR, ESP, brake light control (secondary) (+key) F42 20 Windscreen wiper (+key) F43 5 Driver's side electric window F47 7,5 Passenger side electric window F48 5 Parking sensor control unit, radio, steering wheel controls, central control panel, left control panel, auxiliary panel, battery disconnecting unit (+key) F49 7,5 Air bag (+key) F50 - Climate control, power steering control unit, reverse lights, diesel filter water sensor, flow meter, tachograph (+key) F51 - DEVICE PROTECTED FUSE AMPS Instrument panel (+battery) F53 - Absent F89 - Left main beam headlamp F90 - Right main beam headlamp F91 - Left fog light F92 Right fog light F93 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 215 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 216 Engine compartment fuse box fig. 215 - fig. 216 DEVICE PROTECTED FUSE AMPS ABS pump (+battery) F01 40 Glow plugs (+battery) F02 50 Ignition switch (+battery) F03 30 Headlamp washer (+battery) F04 30 Vaporiser for Puma engine/compartment ventilation with Webasto, robotised gearbox pump (+battery) F05 20/50 Engine cooling high speed fan (+battery) F06 40/60 Engine cooling low speed fan (+battery) F07 40/50 Passenger compartment fan (+key) F08 40 Rear power socket (+battery) F09 15 Horn F10 15 Electric system (secondary services) F11 15 Power socket (+battery) F14 15 Cigar lighter (+battery) F15 10 Electric system (+key) F16 7,5 Electric system (primary services) F17 10 Engine management control unit, robotised gearbox control unit (+battery) F18 7,5 Air conditioning compressor F19 7,5 Windscreen wiper F20 30 DEVICE PROTECTED FUSE AMPS Fuel pump F21 15 Electric system (primary services) F22 20 ABS solenoid valves F23 30 Auxiliary control panel for mirror movement and folding (+key) F24 15 Mirrors demisting F30 15 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 217 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 218 Right central pillar optional fuse box fig. 217 - fig. 218 DEVICE PROTECTED FUSE AMPS Absent F54 – Heated seats F55 15 Rear passenger power socket F56 15 Additional heater under the seat F57 10 Left heated rear window F58 15 Right heated rear window F59 15 Absent F60 – Absent F61 – Absent F62 – Additional passenger heater control F63 10 Absent F64 – Additional passenger heater fan F65 – BATTERY RECHARGING IMPORTANT The battery recharging procedure is given as information only. You are advised to contact a Fiat Dealership to have this operation performed. Low amperage slow recharging for approximately 24 hours is advised. Charging for a longer time may damage the battery. IN THE ABSENCE OF START&STOP SYSTEM Charge the battery as follows: ❒ disconnect the negative battery terminal; ❒ connect the charger cables to the battery terminals, observing the polarity; ❒ turn on the charger; ❒ when finished, turn the charger off before disconnecting the battery; ❒ reconnect the negative battery terminal. WARNING Battery fluid is poisonous and corrosive: avoid contact with your skin and eyes. The battery should be charged in a well ventilated place, away from naked flames or possible sources of sparks: danger of explosion and fire. WARNING Do not attempt to charge a frozen battery: it must be thawed first, otherwise it may explode. If freezing has occurred, the battery should be checked by skilled personnel to make sure that the internal elements are not damaged and that the body is not cracked, with the risk of leaking poisonous and corrosive acid. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 219 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES WITH START&STOP SYSTEM RAISING THE VEHICLE Charge the battery as follows: ❒ disconnect the connector A (by pressing button B) from the battery status monitoring sensor C, on the negative pole D of the battery; ❒ connect the positive cable of the battery charger to the positive battery terminal E and the negative cable to sensor terminal F as in fig. 219; ❒ turn on the charger; ❒ at the end of the charging process, switch the battery charger off; ❒ after having disconnected the charger, reconnect connector A to the sensor C as in fig. 219. If the vehicle needs to be lifted, contact a Fiat Dealership, which is equipped with arm hoists or workshop lifts. The vehicle must only be raised laterally by placing the ends of the arms or workshop lift in the areas shown in fig. 220. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 220 fig. 219 F0N0551 fig. 220 F0N0340 TOWING THE VEHICLE The vehicle is equipped with two rings for attaching the tow hook. WARNING WARNING When towing the vehicle, it is necessary to obey specific road regulations which relate both to the towing device as well as to the behaviour to adopt on the road. Before towing, switch off the steering lock (see "Starting device" paragraph under the "Dashboard and controls" section). KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY WARNING STARTING AND DRIVING Do not start the engine whilst the vehicle is being towed. WARNING The power brakes and power steering will not operate while the vehicle is being towed. More effort on the brake pedal and steering wheel will therefore be required. The front ring is located in the tool box beneath the passenger side seat. On versions with Fix&Go kit and without spare wheel, the tool box is available only on request for versions/markets where provided. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY WARNING Do not use flexible cables when towing and avoid jerky movements. During towing operations, be careful that the fastening joining the joint to the vehicle does not damage adjacent components. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 221 F0N0134 221 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY In the absence of the tool box the vehicle tow hook is housed in the on-board documentation container, together with the Owner Handbook. To use it, proceed as follows: ❒ Open the flap A and remove it as illustrated in fig. 221; STARTING AND DRIVING ❒ turn retaining knob B anticlockwise and remove it fig. 221 to allow the box to come out fig. 222; ❒ take the screwdriver provided from the box and prise up at the point shown to raise the cap C fig. 223; ❒ take the tow ring D from the box and screw it onto the threaded pin fig. 223. The rear ring B fig. 224 is located at the point shown in the diagram. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY fig. 222 F0N0135 fig. 223 F0N0136 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 222 fig. 224 F0N0117 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULED SERVICING Correct servicing is essential for ensuring long vehicle life under the best conditions. This is why Fiat has planned a series of checks and maintenance operations every 48,000 km depending on the engine version. The scheduled servicing does not, however, cover all the needs of the vehicle; also during the initial period, before the 48,000 km service and between one service and the next, ordinary care such as systematic fluid level checks with top ups and tyre pressure checks remain necessary. IMPORTANT The Scheduled Servicing services are set out by the Manufacturer. Failure to have them carried out may invalidate the warranty. Scheduled Servicing is performed by all Fiat Dealerships, at pre-established times. If, during any service, the need arises for additional replacements or repairs, these may be carried out only with the explicit agreement of the Customer. IMPORTANT It is advisable to inform a Fiat Dealer of any small operating irregularities without waiting for the next service. The interval between scheduled services must be reduced if your vehicle is used frequently for towing trailers. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 223 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX SCHEDULED SERVICING PLAN Thousands of miles 30 60 90 120 150 Thousands of km 48 96 144 192 240 Months 24 48 72 96 120 Check battery charge status and possibly recharge ● ● ● ● ● Check tyre condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary ● ● ● ● ● Check operation of lighting system (headlamps, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, luggage compartment, passenger compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.) ● ● ● ● ● Check operation of windscreen wiper/washer system and adjust jets, if necessary ● ● ● ● ● Check the position/wear of the windscreen/rear window wiper blades ● ● ● ● ● Check cleanliness of bonnet and tailgate locks and cleanliness and lubrication of linkages ● ● ● ● ● Visually inspect condition of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel system, brakes), rubber elements (boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.) ● ● ● ● ● Check condition and wear of front disc brake pads and operation of pad wear indicator ● ● ● ● ● Check condition and wear of rear disc brake pads and operation of pad wear indicator (for versions/markets where provided) ● ● ● ● ● Check and, if necessary, top-up fluid levels (engine cooling, hydraulic clutch/brakes, windscreen washer, battery, etc.) ● ● ● ● ● Visual check of accessory drive belt(s) (versions without automatic tensioner) (110 versions (°)- 130 - 150 - 180 MultiJet versions) (°)Version for specific markets 224 ● ● Thousands of miles 30 60 90 120 150 Thousands of km 48 96 144 192 240 Months 24 48 72 96 120 Check tension of accessory drive belt (versions without automatic tensioner) (^) ● Check tension of accessory drive belt (versions without automatic tensioner) (115 MultiJet versions (°)) (^) ● Check condition of toothed timing drive belt (110 versions (°)- 130 - ● ● SAFETY ● STARTING AND DRIVING ● 150 MultiJet versions) Check condition of toothed timing drive belt (115 MultiJet versions (°)) ● ● ● ● ● Check handbrake lever travel and adjust, if required ● ● ● ● ● Check exhaust gas emissions/smokiness ● ● ● ● ● Check operation of engine management systems (using diagnosis socket) ● ● ● ● ● Check cleanliness of sliding side door lower guides for versions with S.S.D. (or every 6 months) ● ● ● ● ● Replace fuel filter cartridge (diesel versions) ● ● ● ● ● ● Replace accessory drive belt(s) Replace the accessory drive belt(s) (115 MultiJet versions (°)) ● (^) When the engine oil is changed for the first time, check the tension of the accessories drive belt. (°)Version for specific markets KNOW YOUR VEHICLE WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ● TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 225 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY Thousands of miles 30 60 90 120 150 Thousands of km 48 96 144 192 240 Months 24 48 72 96 120 Replace toothed timing drive belt (*) (110 versions (°)- 130 - 150 ● MultiJet) ● Replace toothed timing drive belt (*) (115 MultiJet versions (°)) STARTING AND DRIVING Replace air cleaner cartridge (***) ● IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 226 ● ● ● Change engine oil and replace oil filter (**) (#) ● Change brake fluid (or every 24 months) WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ● Replace pollen filter (or every 24 months) ● ● ● ● ● ● (*) Regardless of the distance covered, the timing belt must be changed every 4 years for particularly demanding use (cold climates, town driving, long periods of idling) or at least every 5 years. I (°)Version for specific markets (***) If the vehicle is equipped with a specific air cleaner for dusty areas: -every 20,000 km check and wash cleaner; every 40,000 km replace cleaner. (**) The actual interval for changing the oil and replacing the engine oil filter depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signalled by the warning light or message (if applicable) in the instrument panel (see chapter "Warning lights and messages") or every 24 months (#) If the vehicle is driven mainly in towns, change engine oil and oil filter every 12 months. PERIODIC CHECKS DEMANDING VEHICLE USE Before long journeys, check and, if necessary, restore: ❒ engine coolant level; ❒ brake fluid level; ❒ windscreen washer fluid level; ❒ tyre inflation pressure and condition; ❒ operation of lighting system (headlamps, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, etc.); ❒ operation of screen washer/wiper system and positioning/wear of windscreen/rear window wiper blades. To ensure that the vehicle is always efficient and well maintained, it is advisable to make sure that you carry out the above operations regularly (approximately every 1000 km and every 3000 km for checking and topping up engine oil is advisable). If the vehicle is mostly used in one of the following conditions: ❒ towing a trailer or caravan; ❒ dusty roads; ❒ short, repeated journeys (less than 7-8 km) at sub-zero outside temperatures; ❒ engine often idling or driving long distances at low speeds or long periods of inactivity; you should perform the following inspections more frequently than shown in the Scheduled Servicing Plan: ❒ check front disc brake pad conditions and wear; ❒ check cleanliness of bonnet and boot locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage; ❒ visually inspect conditions of: engine, gearbox, transmission, pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel system - brakes) and rubber elements (boots sleeves - bushes - etc.); ❒ check battery charge and battery fluid level (electrolyte); ❒ visually inspect condition of the accessory drive belts; ❒ check and, if necessary, change engine oil and replace oil filter. ❒ check and, if necessary, replace pollen filter. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 227 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 228 CHECKING FLUID LEVELS Be careful, when topping up, and take care not to mix up the various types of fluids: they are all incompatible with one another and could seriously damage the car. WARNING Never smoke while working in the engine compartment: inflammable gases and vapours may be present, constituting a fire risk. 115 MultiJet versions KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE fig. 225 F0N0530M 1. Engine coolant fluid 2. Power steering fluid 3. Windscreen washer fluid 4. Brake fluid 5. Engine oil TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 229 110 - 130 - 150 MultiJet versions KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE fig. 226 1. Engine coolant fluid 2. Power steering fluid 3. Windscreen washer fluid 4. Brake fluid 5. Engine oil TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 230 F0N0100 180 MultiJet Power versions KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE fig. 227 F0N0210 1. Engine coolant fluid 2. Power steering fluid 3. Windscreen washer fluid 4. Brake fluid 5. Engine oil TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 231 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ENGINE OIL Engine oil consumption Check the oil level a few minutes (about 5) after the engine has stopped, with the vehicle parked on level ground. Check that the level is within the MIN and MAX marks on the dipstick B fig. 228 - fig. 229 - fig. 230. The range between the MIN and MAX marks corresponds to about 1 litre of oil. If the oil level is close to or actually below the MIN. mark, pour in the prescribed oil through the filler A fig. 228 - fig. 229 - fig. 230, until it reaches the MAX mark. The oil level must never exceed the MAX mark. The maximum engine oil consumption is usually 400 grams every 1000 km. When the vehicle is new, the engine needs to be run in, therefore the engine oil consumption can only be considered stabilised after the first 5,000 – 6,000 km. IMPORTANT The oil consumption depends on driving style and the conditions under which the vehicle is used. IMPORTANT After adding or changing the oil, let the engine run for a few seconds and wait a few minutes after switching it off before checking the level. IMPORTANT Always top up using engine oil of the same specifications as that already in the engine. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 232 fig. 228 - 115 MultiJet versions F0N0531M fig. 229 - 110 - 130 - 150 MultiJet versions F0N0102 WARNING Be very careful when working in the engine compartment when the engine is hot: you may get burned. Remember that the fan may start up if the engine is hot: this could injure you. Scarves, ties and other loose clothing might be pulled by moving parts. The used engine oil and the filter that has been replaced contain substances that are harmful to the environment.To change the oil and filters, we advise you to contact a Fiat Dealership. ENGINE COOLANT The coolant level must be checked when the engine is cold and must be between the MIN and MAX marks on the reservoir. If the level is low, slowly pour a mixture of 50% demineralised water and 50% PARAFLUUP by PETRONAS LUBRICANTS through the filler neck A fig. 231 - fig. 232 until the level is close to MAX. A 50-50 mixture of PARAFLUUP and distilled water gives freeze protection up to –35°C. For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% PARAFLUUP and 40% demineralised water is recommended. PARAFLU UP antifreeze is used in the engine cooling system. Use fluid of the same type as that contained in the cooling system for any top-ups. PARAFLUUP cannot be mixed with any other type of fluid. If this happens, do not start the engine and contact a Fiat Dealership. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 230 - 180 MultiJet Power versions F0N0211 fig. 231 - 115 MultiJet versions F0N0532M 233 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY WINDSCREEN/REAR WINDOW WASHING FLUID WARNING The cooling system is pressurised. If necessary, only replace the cap with another genuine one or the operation of the system may be adversely affected. Do not remove the reservoir cap when the engine is hot: you risk scalding yourself. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES To top up, remove the cap A fig. 233 - fig. 234. Use a mixture of water and TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35, in the following concentrations: 30% TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35 and 70% water in summer. 50% TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35 and 50% water in winter. At temperatures below -20°C, use undiluted TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 234 fig. 232 - 110 - 130 - 150 - 180 MultiJet versions F0N0103 fig. 233 - 115 MultiJet versions F0N0533M BRAKE FLUID Check the level through the reservoir. WARNING Do not travel if the windscreen washer reservoir is empty: using the windscreen washer is essential for improving visibility. WARNING Some commercial windscreen washer additives are flammable.The engine compartment contains hot parts which could start a fire on contact. Undo the cap A fig. 235 and check that the liquid contained in the reservoir is at the maximum level. The fluid level in the reservoir must not exceed the MAX mark. If you need to top up, you should use the brake fluid shown in the "Fluids and lubricants" table (see chapter "Technical specifications"). NOTE Thoroughly clean the tank cap A and the surrounding surface. When opening the cap, make sure that no dirt gets into the reservoir. For topping-up, always use a funnel with integrated filter with mesh equal to or lower than 0.12 mm. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 234 - 110 - 130 - 150 - 180 MultiJet versions F0N0105 fig. 235 F0N0107 235 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE IMPORTANT Brake fluid absorbs moisture. For this reason, if the vehicle is mainly used in areas with a high degree of atmospheric humidity, the fluid should be replaced at more frequent intervals than specified in the “Scheduled Servicing Plan”. SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Prevent brake fluid, which is highly corrosive, from coming into contact with painted parts. Should it happen, immediately wash with water. WARNING Brake fluid is poisonous and highly corrosive. If contact accidentally occurs, immediately wash the affected areas with water and a neutral detergent, and then rinse thoroughly with water. Call a doctor immediately if swallowed. POWER STEERING FLUID Check that the liquid contained in the tank is at the maximum level. This operation must be carried out with the vehicle level and with the engine off and cold. Check that the fluid level is up to the MAX mark on the dipstick attached to the fuel cap fig. 236 - fig. 237 (use the level shown on the 20°C side of the dipstick to check when cold). If the level of the fluid in the tank is lower than the specified level, top up using only one of the products indicated in the "Fluid and lubricants" table in the "Technical specifications" section, proceeding as follows: ❒ Start the engine and wait for the fluid level in the tank to stabilise. WARNING The symbol on the container indicates a synthetic brake fluid, which is different from a mineral fluid. Using a mineral-type fluid will damage the special rubber seals of the braking system beyond repair. INDEX 236 fig. 236 - 115 MultiJet versions F0N0534M ❒ With the engine running, turn the steering wheel from right to left fully several times. ❒ Top up the fuel to the MAX level and then retighten the cap. Do not press the power steering end of travel lock for longer than 8 consecutive seconds with the engine running because it will cause noise and risk damaging the system. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY WARNING Prevent power steering fluid from coming into contact with hot engine parts: it is flammable. Power steering fluid consumption is extremely low; if another top-up is required after only a short period of time, have the system checked for leaks at a Fiat Dealership. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 237 - 110 - 130 - 150 - 180 MultiJet versions F0N0109 237 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY AIR FILTER/POLLEN FILTER Have the air cleaner replaced by a Fiat Dealership. AIR CLEANER – DUSTY ROADS (for versions/markets, where provided) The air cleaner for dusty areas is equipped with a visual filter block indication device A fig. 238. Check the reading of the filter blocked device at intervals (Refer to the "Service Schedule" in the "Maintenance and care" section). When the setting is reached the indicator is triggered B fig. 239, changing to red, even with the engine off. To reset the indicator, clean/replace the cartridge as on normal versions and then reset the indicator by pressing the button C fig. 239. Because this filter is specific to versions designed for dusty areas, it is advisable to contact a Fiat Dealership to change the filter. POLLEN FILTER Pollen filter replacement must be carried out at a Fiat Dealership. IMPORTANT To clean the filter, use an air jet, do not use water or liquid detergents. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 238 fig. 238 F0N0253 fig. 239 F0N0254 BATTERY REPLACING THE BATTERY The battery is “limited maintenance” type: under normal conditions of use, the electrolyte does not need topping up with distilled water. It does, however, need to be checked periodically at a Fiat Dealership or by specialist personnel to make sure it is working correctly. The battery is located inside the passenger compartment, in front of the pedal unit. Remove the protective cover to gain access to it. If required, replace the battery with an original spare part with the same specifications. If a battery with different specifications is fitted, the service intervals given in the “Scheduled Servicing Plan” will no longer be valid. Follow the battery manufacturer's instructions for maintenance. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Incorrect assembly of electric and electronic devices may cause severe damage to your vehicle. Contact a Fiat Dealership if you want to install accessories after purchasing the vehicle (alarms, radiophone, etc.): they will suggest the most suitable devices and advise you whether a higher capacity battery needs to be installed. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING Battery liquid is poisonous and corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. Keep naked flames and sources of sparks away from the battery: risk of explosion and fire. WARNING Using the battery with insufficient battery fluid may irreparably damage the battery and may cause an explosion. WARNING Before performing any operation on the electrical system, disconnect the negative battery cable through the suitable terminal, after having waited at least one minute from turning the ignition key to STOP. Batteries contain substances which are very dangerous for the environment. To replace your battery, we recommend contacting your Fiat Dealership to dispose of your old battery in full respect of the environment and in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations. SAFETY WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 239 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 240 If the vehicle needs to be off the road for a long period under conditions of intense cold, remove the battery and take it to a heated location, otherwise it may freeze. WARNING When performing any operation on the battery or near it, always protect your eyes with special goggles. USEFUL ADVICE FOR EXTENDING THE LIFE OF YOUR BATTERY To avoid draining your battery and make it last longer, observe the following instructions: ❒ when you park the vehicle, ensure that the doors, tailgate and bonnet are closed properly, to prevent any roof lights from remaining on inside the passenger's compartment; ❒ switch off all roof lights inside the vehicle: the vehicle is however equipped with a system which switches all internal lights off automatically; ❒ do not keep accessories (e.g. sound system, hazard lights, etc.) switched on for a long time when the engine is not running; ❒ before performing any operation on the electrical system, disconnect the negative battery cable; ❒ Completely tighten the battery terminals. IMPORTANT If the charge level remains under 50% for a long time, the battery is damaged by sulphation, reducing its capacity and efficiency at start-up. The battery is also more prone to the risk of freezing (at temperatures as high as -10°C). Refer to the paragraph "Car inactivity" in "Starting and driving" if the car is left parked for a long time. If, after buying the vehicle, you want to install electric accessories which require permanent electric supply (alarm, etc.) contact a Fiat Dealership whose qualified personnel, in addition to suggesting the most suitable devices from the Lineaccessori Fiat, will evaluate the overall electric absorption, checking whether the vehicle's electrical system is capable of withstanding the load required, or whether it should be integrated with a more powerful battery. Since these devices continue absorbing energy even when the engine is off, they gradually run down the battery. IMPORTANT If a tachograph is fitted, if the vehicle is parked for a long period of 5 days, it is advisable to disconnect the negative battery terminal to maintain its charge. If the vehicle is equipped with a battery disconnection function (disconnector), see the description of the procedure in the "Controls" paragraph in the "Know your vehicle" section. WHEELS AND TYRES Check the pressure of each tyre, including the space-saver wheel, every two weeks and before long journeys. The pressure should be checked with the tyre rested and cold. It is normal for the pressure to increase when the vehicle is used; for the correct tyre inflation pressure, see “Wheels” in the “Technical specifications” section. Incorrect pressure causes abnormal tyre wear fig. 240: A normal pressure: tread evenly worn; B low pressure: tread particularly worn at the edges; C high pressure: tread particularly worn in the centre. The tyres must be replaced when the tread is less than 1.6 mm thick. In any case, follow the laws in force in the country where you are driving. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 241 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY IMPORTANT NOTES ❒ As far as possible, avoid sharp braking and screech starts. Be careful not to hit the kerb, potholes or other hard obstacles. Driving for long stretches over bumpy roads can damage the tyres; ❒ periodically check that the tyres have no cuts in the side wall, abnormal swelling or irregular tyre wear. Contact a Fiat Dealership if required; ❒ avoid overloading the car when travelling: this may cause serious damage to the wheels and tyres; ❒ if a tyre is punctured, stop immediately and change it to avoid damage to the tyre, the rim, suspensions and steering system; ❒ tyres age even if they are not used much. Cracks in the tread and on the sidewalls are a sign of ageing. Have the tyres checked by skilled personnel if they have been fitted for longer than six years. WARNING Remember that the road holding qualities of your vehicle also depend on the correct inflation pressure of the tyres. WARNING If the pressure is too low the tyre overheats and can be seriously damaged. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS WARNING Do not switch tyres from the right­hand side of the vehicle to the left­hand side, and vice versa. INDEX 242 Remember to check the spare wheel very carefully; ❒ In the case of replacement, always fit new tyres, avoiding those of dubious origin; ❒ If a tyre is changed, also change the inflation valve; ❒ to allow even wear between the front and rear tyres, it is advisable to change them over every 10-15 thousand kilometres, keeping them on the same side of the vehicle so as not to reverse the direction of rotation. fig. 240 F0N0111 WARNING Never submit alloy rims to repainting treatments requiring the use of temperatures exceeding 150°C.The mechanical properties of the wheels could be impaired. RUBBER HOSES As far as the brake system and fuel system rubber hoses are concerned, follow the “Scheduled Servicing Plan” in this section carefully. Ozone, high temperatures and a prolonged lack of fluid in the system may cause hardening and cracking of the hoses, which could result in leaks. Careful checking is therefore necessary. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 243 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS WINDSCREEN WIPER BLADES Periodically clean the rubber part using special products; TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35 is recommended. Replace the blades if the rubber edge is deformed or worn. In any case, it is advisable to replace them approximately once a year. A few simple precautions can reduce the possibility of damage to the blades: ❒ if the temperature falls below zero, make sure that ice has not frozen the rubber against the glass. Use a de-icing product to release it if required; ❒ remove any snow from the glass: in addition to protecting the blades, this prevents effort on the motor and over-heating; ❒ do not operate the windscreen and rear window wipers on dry glass. Replacing the wiper blades Proceed as follows: ❒ raise the windscreen wiper arm A fig. 241 and position the blade so that it forms an angle of 90° with the arm; ❒ remove the press-fitted blade B from arm A; ❒ insert the new blade making sure it is locked into place. WARNING Driving with worn wiper blades is a serious hazard, because visibility is reduced in bad weather. INDEX 244 fig. 241 F0N0137 HEADLIGHT WASHERS SPRAY NOZZLES Front windscreen (washer) fig. 242 If there is no jet of fluid, firstly check that there is fluid in the reservoir (see “Checking fluid levels” in this chapter). Then check that the nozzle holes are not clogged; use a needle to unblock them if necessary. The washer jets should be positioned by adjusting the angle of the sprays using a small straight-headed screwdriver. The jets must be directed at about 1/3 of the height from the top edge of the windscreen. Check the condition and cleanliness of nozzles at regular intervals. The headlamp washers are activated automatically when the screen washer is operated with the dipped headlamps on. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 242 F0N0112 245 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 246 BODYWORK PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC AGENTS The main causes of corrosion are the following: ❒ atmospheric pollution; ❒ salty air and humidity (coastal areas, or hot humid climates); ❒ seasonal environmental conditions. The abrasive action of wind-borne atmospheric dust and sand, as well as mud and gravel raised by other vehicles is also not to be underestimated. On your vehicle, Fiat has implemented the best manufacturing technologies to effectively protect the bodywork against corrosion. These include: ❒ painting products and systems which give the vehicle particular resistance to corrosion and abrasion; ❒ Use of galvanised (or pretreated) steel sheets, with high resistance to corrosion; ❒ spraying the underbody, engine compartment, wheelhouse internal parts and other parts with highly protective wax products; ❒ spraying of plastic parts, with a protective function in the more exposed points: underdoor, inner wing, edges, etc; ❒ use of “open” boxed sections to prevent condensation and pockets of moisture from triggering rust inside. VEHICLE BODY AND UNDERBODY WARRANTY Your vehicle is covered by warranty against perforation due to rust of any original element of the structure or body. For the general terms of this warranty, refer to your Warranty Booklet. ADVICE FOR PRESERVING THE BODYWORK Paint Paintwork does not only serve an aesthetic purpose, but also protects the underlying sheet metal. Touch-up abrasions and scratches immediately to prevent the formation of rust. Only use genuine spare paint products for touch-ups (see “Bodywork paint identification plate” in the “Technical Specifications” section). Standard maintenance of paintwork consists in washing the vehicle; its frequency depends on the conditions and environment where the vehicle is used. For example, it is advisable to wash the vehicle more often in areas with high atmospheric pollution or if you are travelling on roads spread with salt. To correctly wash the vehicle proceed as follows: ❒ wash the body using a low pressure jet of water; ❒ wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy solution over the bodywork, frequently rinsing with the sponge; ❒ rinse well with water and dry with a jet of air or a chamois leather. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 247 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 248 If you put the vehicle through a car wash, follow these recommendations: ❒ remove the aerial from the roof so it does not get damaged; ❒ the car wash should use water added to a soapy solution; ❒ rinse thoroughly to avoid soap marks staying on the bodywork or less visible parts. Some car washes with old-style blades and/or in a poor state of repair can damage the paintwork, facilitating the formation of lines that give the paint a dull/misty appearance, especially on dark colours. If this happens, lightly polish the paintwork with appropriate products. Dry the less visible parts, such as the door frames, bonnet and the headlight frames with special care, as in these areas water may stagnate more easily. It is a good idea to leave the vehicle outdoors for a while after washing it to give the water time to evaporate. Do not wash the vehicle after it has been left in the sun or with the bonnet hot: this may alter the shine of the paintwork. Exterior plastic parts should be cleaned in the same way as the rest of the vehicle. Where possible, do not park the vehicle under trees; the resinous substances released by many species give the paint a dull appearance and increase the possibility of rust. IMPORTANT Bird droppings must be washed off immediately and thoroughly as the acid they contain is particularly aggressive. Detergents pollute the environment.The vehicle should be washed in areas equipped for collecting and purifying the liquid used in the washing process. Windows Front headlights To clean windows, use specific cleaning products. Also use clean cloths to avoid scratching the glass or damaging the transparency. IMPORTANT Never use aromatic substances (e.g. petrol) or ketenes (e.g. acetone) for cleaning the plastic lenses of the front headlights. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE IMPORTANT Wipe the rear window inside gently with a cloth in the direction of the filaments to avoid damaging the heating device. SAFETY Engine compartment STARTING AND DRIVING At the end of each winter, thoroughly wash the engine compartment, taking care to avoid spraying the water jet directly onto the electronic control units and the relay/fuse box on the left side of the engine compartment (driving direction). Have this operation performed at a specialised workshop. IMPORTANT The washing should take place with the engine cold and the ignition key in the STOP position. After the washing operation, make sure that the various protections (e.g. rubber caps and guards) have not been removed or damaged. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 249 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY INTERIORS SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS Regularly check that water is not trapped under the mats (due to water dripping off shoes, umbrellas, etc.), as this could cause oxidation of the sheet metal. Remove dust with a soft brush or a vacuum cleaner. It is advisable to use a moist brush on velvet upholstery. WARNING STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 250 Never use flammable products, such as petroleum ether or modified petrol, to clean the inside of the vehicle.The electrostatic charges which are generated by rubbing during the cleaning operation may cause a fire. WARNING Do not keep aerosol cans in the vehicle: they might explode. Aerosol cans must not be exposed to a temperature exceeding 50°C.When the vehicle is exposed to sunlight, the internal temperature can greatly exceed this value. Rub the seats with a sponge and a solution of water and mild soap. PLASTIC PARTS It is advisable to clean interior plastic parts with a damp cloth and a solution of water and mild, non-abrasive detergent. Use specific products for cleaning plastic, without solvents and specifically designed to prevent damage to the appearance and colour of the treated parts to remove grease and tough stains. IMPORTANT Never use spirits or petroleum to clean the instrument panel. LEATHER STEERING WHEEL/GEAR KNOB/HANDBRAKE (for versions/markets, where provided) These components must be cleaned with mild soap and water only. Never use alcohol or alcohol-based products. Read the product label carefully before using specific products for cleaning the interiors: make sure the product does not contain spirits or alcohol-based substances. If, when cleaning the windscreen with special products, window cleaner accidentally drips onto the leather of the steering wheel/gear lever knob/hand brake, wipe away immediately and then wash the affected area with mild soap and water. IMPORTANT Be careful when using a steering wheel lock device, where applicable, to avoid damaging the leather upholstery by rubbing. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 251 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS KNOW YOUR VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION DATA SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES We recommend taking note of the identification codes. Identification codes are printed and shown on the plates as indicated below, together with the positions: ❒ VIN plate. ❒ Chassis marking. ❒ Bodywork paint identification plate. ❒ Engine marking. V.I.N. PLATE IN AN EMERGENCY This plate is fitted to the engine compartment front crossmember and contains the following data fig. 243: SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 252 fig. 243 F0N0333 B Type-approval number. C Vehicle type identification code D Chassis serial number. E Maximum authorised weight of vehicle fully laden F Maximum authorised weight of vehicle fully laden plus trailer. G Maximum permitted weight on first (front) axle H Maximum permitted weight on second (rear) axle I Engine type. L Bodywork version code. M Spares number. N Correct value of smoke coefficient (for diesel engines) CHASSIS MARKING They are located respectively: one on the passenger side interior wheel arch, A fig. 244, and the other on the low part of the windscreen fig. 245. The marking includes: ❒ type of vehicle; ❒ chassis serial number. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE BODYWORK PAINT IDENTIFICATION PLATE This plate is fitted to the engine compartment front crossmember fig. 246 and contains the following data: A Paint manufacturer. B Colour name. C Fiat colour code. D Respray and touch up code. SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ENGINE MARKING fig. 244 F0N0162 This is stamped on the cylinder block and gives the model and the chassis serial number. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX fig. 245 F0N0338 fig. 246 F0N0160 253 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSION Version SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING Engine code 110 MultiJet (*) F1AE3481G 115 MultiJet (*) 250A1000 130 MultiJet F1AE3481D 150 MultiJet F1AE3481E 180 MultiJet Power F1CE3481E (*)Version for specific markets WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 254 There is an example of a bodywork version code below by way of explanation with a key which is valid for all bodywork version codes: Example: 250 A M M F A DX 250 MODEL A GVW M ENGINE M ENGINE TRANSMISSION/AXLES F BODYWORK A WHEELBASE RH VERSION GVW A 3000 kg B 3300 kg C 3500 kg D 3500 kg MAXI E 4005/4250 kg F 2800 kg G 3650 kg ENGINE M 130 MultiJet N 150 MultiJet P 180 MultiJet Power R 115 MultiJet V 110 MultiJet TRANSMISSION M Manual gearbox A Automatic gearbox WHEELBASE A Short wheelbase B Medium wheelbase C Long wheelbase D Medium-long wheelbase U All wheelbases (incomplete vehicles) BODYWORK A Cab chassis B Chassis without cab C Platform chassis cab D Box truck E Primary school bus F Van G Long cab trailer H Long cab chassis L Middle school bus M Bus P Panorama R 6/9 seater crew cab KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 255 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 256 115 MultiJet (*) (*) F1AE3481G 150 MultiJet 180 MultiJet Power 250A1000 F1AE3481D F1AE3481E F1CE3481E Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel Number and arrangement of cylinders 4 in line 4 in line 4 in line 4 in line 4 in line Piston diameter and travel (mm) 88 x 94 83 x 90.4 88 x 94 88 x 94 95.8 x 104 Total displacement (cm3) 2287 1956 2287 2287 2999 16,2 : 1 16,5 : 1 16,2 : 1 16,2 : 1 17,5 : 1 Maximum power (EEC) (kW) 82,5 84,6 96 109 130 Maximum power (EEC) (HP) 110 115 130 148 177 Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 3600 3750 3600 3600 3500 Max torque (EEC) (Nm) 300 280 320 350 400 Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 1800 1500 1800 1500 1400 Type code SAFETY 110 MultiJet 130 MultiJet General information Cycle Compression ratio Fuel (*)Version for specific markets Diesel for motor vehicles (EN590 specification) FUEL SUPPLY Versions All Fuel supply Common Rail direct injection WARNING Modifications or repairs to the fuel supply system that are not carried out correctly or do not take the system's technical specifications into account can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 257 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE TRANSMISSION Versions 115 MultiJet (*) SAFETY 110 MultiJet (*) STARTING AND DRIVING 130 MultiJet 150 MultiJet 180 MultiJet Power WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 258 Drive Self-adjusting pedal without idle stroke Front Five forward gears and reverse with synchronizers for forward gear engagement Six forward gears plus reverse with synchronisers for forward gear engagement SUSPENSION Front Rear SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Clutch (*)Version for specific markets Versions IN AN EMERGENCY Gearbox Front Rear independent wheel MacPherson type Tubular rigid beam axle; longitudinal leaf spring BRAKES Front service brakes Rear service brakes Parking brake self-ventilated discs discs controlled by hand lever, working on rear brakes IMPORTANT Water, ice and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake disks reducing braking efficiency the first time the brakes are applied. STEERING Versions Turning circle (m) Short wheelbase 11,06 Medium wheelbase 12,46 Medium-long wheelbase 13,54 Long wheelbase 14,28 Type rack and pinion with hydraulic power steering KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 259 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES WHEELS CORRECT READING OF THE TYRE RIMS AND TYRES Example: 215/70 R 15 109S (see fig. 247) 215 Rated width (S, distance in mm between sidewalls) 70 Height/width ratio (H/S) as a percentage R Radial tyre 15 Rim diameter in inches (Ø) 109 Load rating (capacity) S Maximum speed rating Pressed steel or alloy rims. Tubeless radial carcass tyres. The vehicle registration document also lists all type-approved tyres. IMPORTANT If there are any discrepancies between the Owner handbook and the registration document, take the information from the latter. For safe driving, the vehicle must be fitted with tyres of the same make and type on all wheels. IMPORTANT Do not use tubes with tubeless tires. SPARE WHEEL Pressed steel rim. Tubeless tyre. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE WHEEL GEOMETRY Front wheel toe-in measured from rim to rim: -1 ± 1 mm. The values refer to the vehicle in running order. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 260 fig. 247 F0N0113 Maximum speed rating Q up to 160 km/h R up to 170 km/h S up to 180 km/h T up to 190 km/h U up to 200 km/h H up to 210 km/h V up to 240 km/h Maximum speed index for snow tyres QM + S up to 160 km/h TM + S up to 190 km/h HM + S up to 210 km/h Load rating (capacity) 70 335 kg 71 345 kg 72 355 kg 73 365 kg 74 375 kg 75 387 kg 76 400 kg 77 412 kg 78 425 kg 79 437 kg 80 450 kg 81 462 kg 82 475 83 487 84 500 85 515 86 530 87 545 88 560 89 580 90 600 91 615 kg kg kg kg kg kg kg kg kg kg KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 261 RIM PROTECTOR TYRES KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING CORRECT READING OF THE WHEEL RIM WARNING DO NOT fit hub caps when using integral caps fixed (with springs) to the steel rim and aftersale tyres provided with Rim Protector fig. 248. Use of unsuitable tyres and wheel caps may cause sudden loss of tyre pressure. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 262 fig. 248 F0N0860 Example: 6J x 15 ET 43 (see fig. 247) 6 rim diameter in inches (1). J rim drop centre outline (side projection where the tyre bead rests) (2). 15 rim nominal diameter in inches (corresponds to diameter of the tyre to be mounted) (3 = Ø). ET 43 wheel camber (distance between the disc/rim support plane and the wheel rim centre line). RIMS AND TYRES PROVIDED AS STANDARD Versions Rims Tyres provided Ducato (*) 6Jx15'' - H2 205/70 R15C 106/104R (*) Ducato (except recreational) 6Jx15'' - H2 Ducato (recreational) 6Jx15'' - H2 Ducato Maxi (except recreational) 6Jx16'' - H2 Ducato Maxi (recreational) 6Jx16'' - H2 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 215/70 R15C 109/107S 225/70 R15C 112/110S SAFETY 215/70 R15CP 109/107Q 215/70 R16C 116/114R STARTING AND DRIVING 225/75 R16C 118/116R 225/75 R16C 116/114Q WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES (*) Version for specific markets If using M+S winter tyres with speed index lower than “S” for 15" wheels and “R” for 16" wheels, respect the max. vehicle speed indicated in the table: Maximum speed index. IN AN EMERGENCY IMPORTANT Only use the tyres indicated on the vehicle registration document. If using class C tyres on a Camping vehicle, always use wheels with a metal inflation valve. When replacing, it is always advisable to use Camping tyres. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 263 COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar) KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Tyres provided Use Front Rear 3000 GVW (*) with basic tyres, except for PANORAMA 3300 GVW (*) / 3500 GVW (*) with basic tyres 4,0 ± 0,05 4,0 ± 0,05 4,1 ± 0,05 4,5 ± 0,05 PANORAMA with basic tyres 4,1 ± 0,05 4,5 ± 0,05 3000 GVW (*) with oversized tyres, except 4,0 ± 0,05 4,0 ± 0,05 for PANORAMA 3300 GVW (*) / 3500 GVW (*) with oversized tyres 4,1 ± 0,05 4,5 ± 0,05 Winter tyres M+S class C on Camping vehicle 4,3 ± 0,05 4,75 ± 0,05 PANORAMA with oversized tyres 4,1 ± 0,05 4,5 ± 0,05 Range with camping tyres 5,0 ± 0,05 5,5 ± 0,05 215/75 R16 Maxi range with basic tyres 4,5 ± 0,05 5,0 ± 0,05 225/75 R16 Maxi range with oversized tyres 4,5 ± 0,05 5,0 ± 0,05 225/75 R16 C Winter tyres M+S class C on Camping vehicle 5,2 ± 0,05 5,2 ± 0,05 225/75 R16 CP Maxi range with Camping tyres 5,5 ± 0,05 5,5 ± 0,05 215/70 R15 SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING 215/70 R15 225/70 R15 225/70 R15 C WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 264 225/70 R15 215/70 R15 CP (*)Gross vehicle weight Add +0.3 bar to the prescribed pressure when the tyres are warm. However, recheck that the value is correct with the tyre cold. With snow tyres, add +0.2 bar to the inflation pressure value prescribed for standard tyres. DIMENSIONS KNOW YOUR VEHICLE VAN VERSION Dimensions are expressed in mm and refer to the vehicle fitted with standard tyres. Height is measured with the vehicle unladen. SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS fig. 249 F0N0852 INDEX 265 VAN KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 266 CH1 - CH2 MH1 - MH2 LH2 - LH3 XLH2 - XLH3 A 948 948 948 948 B 3000 3450 4035 4035 C 1015 1015 1015 1380 D 4963 5413 5998 6363 E 2254 - 2524 2254 - 2524 2524 - 2764 2524 - 2764 F 1810 1810 1810 1810 G 2050 2050 2050 2050 I 1790 1790 1790 1790 The sizes vary according to the various versions within the limits indicated above TRUCK VERSION KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Dimensions are expressed in mm and refer to the vehicle fitted with standard tyres. Height is measured with the vehicle unladen. SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE fig. 250 F0N0342 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 267 FLATBED KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 268 CHASSIS CAB CH1 MH1 LH1 XLH1 CH1 MH1 MLH1 LH1 XLH1 XXLH1 A 948 948 948 948 948 948 948 948 948 B 3000 3450 4035 4035 3000 3450 3800 4035 4035 4300 C 1345 1345 1345 1710 960 960 960 1325 1590 D 5293 5743 6328 6693 4908 5358 5708 5943 6308 6573 E 2798 3248 3833 4198 - - - - - F 2254 2254 2254 2254 2254 2254 2254 2254 2519 G 1810 1810 1810 1810 1810 1810 1810 1810 1810 H 1790 1790 1790 1790 1790 1980 1790 1980 1790 1980 1790 1980 1790 1980 L 2100 2100 2100 2100 2050 2050 2050 2050 2050 The sizes vary according to the various versions within the limits indicated above CHASSIS COWL SPECIAL CAB CH1 MH1 MLH1 CH1 MH1 MLH1 LH1 XLH1 XXLH1 LH1 XLH1 XXLH1 A 925 925 925 925 925 948 948 948 948 948 B 3000 3450 3800 4035 4035 4300 3000 3450 3800 4035 4035 4300 C 860 860 860 1225 1490 880 880 880 1245 1510 D 4785 5235 5585 5820 6125 6390 4828 5278 5628 5863 6228 6493 E - - - - - - - - - - F - - - - - 2254 2254 2254 2254 2254 G 1810 1810 1810 1810 1810 1810 1810 1810 1810 1810 H 1790 1980 1790 1980 1790 1980 1790 1980 1790 1980 1790 1980 1790 1980 1790 1980 1790 1980 1790 1980 L 2050 2050 2050 2050 2050 2050 2050 2050 2050 2050 The sizes vary according to the various versions within the limits indicated above KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 269 SPECIAL CHASSIS COWL KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 270 CH1 MH1 - MH2 LH1 XLH1 XXLH1 A 925 925 925 925 925 B 3000 3450 - 3800 4035 4035 4300 C 880 880 880 1245 1510 D 4805 5255 - 5605 5840 6205 6470 G 1810 1810 1810 1810 1810 H 1790 - 1980 1790 - 1980 1790 - 1980 1790 - 1980 1790 - 1980 L 2050 2050 2050 2050 2050 The sizes vary according to the various versions within the limits indicated above PERFORMANCE Top permitted speed after initial vehicle use in km/h. 110 MultiJet (*) VAN TRUCKS WITH TRAILER (*) Maxi range 115 MultiJet (*) 130 MultiJet 150 MultiJet 180 MultiJet Power CH1 - MH1 145 148 155 161 (*) / 162 161 (*) / 171 CH2 - MH2 LH2 - XLH2 142 143 150 157 160 (*) / 166 LH3 - XLH3 137 138 145 152 155 (*) / 161 145 148 155 157 161 (*) / 171 CH1 MH1 - LH1 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 271 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE WEIGHTS VAN WEIGHTS 3000 kg GVW versions(***) SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES 115 MultiJet (°) 110 (°)/130/150 MultiJet 180 MultiJet Power Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment) 1845 ÷ 1910 1860 ÷ 1925 1910 ÷ 1975 Payload (*) including the driver: 1090 ÷ 1155 1075 ÷ 1140 1025 ÷ 1090 – front axle: 1630 1630 1630 – rear axle: 1650 1650 1650 – total: 3000 3000 3000 – trailer with brakes: 2000 2500 2500 – trailer without brakes: 750 750 750 Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes): 100 100 100 Maximum load on roof (evenly distributed): 150 150 150 Maximum permitted loads (**) Towable loads: IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 272 (***)The values indicated refer to panel and glazed Vans in medium and short wheelbases with high and low sides. (°)Version for specific markets (*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to the maximum permitted loads. (**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads. VAN WEIGHTS 3300 kg GVW versions(***) 115 MultiJet (°) 110 (°)/130/150 MultiJet 180 MultiJet Power Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment) 1845 ÷ 1985 1860 ÷ 2000 1910 ÷ 2050 Payload (*) including the driver: 1315 ÷ 1455 1300 ÷ 1440 1250 ÷ 1390 – front axle: 1750 1750 1750 – rear axle: 1900 1900 1900 – total: 3300 3300 3300 Towable loads (braked trailer): 2000 2500 2500 Towable loads (non-braked trailer): 750 750 750 Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes): 100 100 100 Maximum load on roof (evenly distributed): 150 150 150 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY Maximum permitted loads (**) (***)The values indicated refer to panel and glazed Vans in medium and short wheelbases with high and low sides. (°)Version for specific markets (*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to the maximum permitted loads. (**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 273 VAN WEIGHTS KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY 3500 kg GVW versions(***) 115 MultiJet (°) 110 (°)/130/150 MultiJet 180 MultiJet Power Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment) 1845 ÷ 1985 1860 ÷ 2000 1910 ÷ 2050 Payload (*) including the driver: 1515 ÷ 1655 1500 ÷ 1640 1450 ÷ 1590 – front axle: 1850 1850 1850 – rear axle: 2000 2000 2000 – total: 3500 3500 3500 Towable loads (braked trailer): 2000 2500 2500 Towable loads (non-braked trailer): 750 750 750 Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes): 100 100 100 Maximum load on roof (evenly distributed): 150 150 150 Maximum permitted loads (**) STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 274 (***)The values indicated refer to panel and glazed Vans in medium and short wheelbases with high and low sides. (°)Version for specific markets (*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to the maximum permitted loads. (**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads. VAN WEIGHTS (MAXI versions) Versions with GVW 3500 kg Versions with GVW 4000 kg (***) (***) 110 (°)/130/150 MultiJet 110 180 MultiJet Power (°)/130/150 MultiJet 180 MultiJet Power Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment) 1940 ÷ 2090 1990 ÷ 2140 2010 ÷ 2135 2060 ÷ 2185 Payload (*) including driver: 1410 ÷ 1560 1360 ÷ 1510 1865 ÷ 1990 1815 ÷ 1940 – front axle: 2100 2100 2100 2100 – rear axle: 2400 2400 2400 2400 – total: 3500 3500 4000 4000 Towable loads (braked trailer): 3000 3000 2500 2500 Towable loads (non-braked trailer): 750 750 750 750 Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes): 120 120 100 100 Maximum load on roof (evenly distributed): 150 150 150 150 Maximum permitted loads (**) (***)The values indicated refer to panel and glazed Vans in medium and short wheelbases with high and low sides. (°)Version for specific markets (*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to the maximum permitted loads. (**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 275 TRUCK TRAILER WEIGHTS KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY 3000 kg GVW versions 115 MultiJet (°) 110 (°)/130 MultiJet 180 MultiJet Power Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment) 1795 ÷ 1840 1810 ÷ 1855 1860 ÷ 1905 Payload (*) including the driver: 1125 ÷ 1160 1125 ÷ 1145 1095 ÷ 1140 – front axle: 1630 1630 1630 – rear axle: 1650 1650 1650 2920-3000 2935-3000 2935-3000 – trailer with brakes: 2000 2500 2500 – trailer without brakes: 750 750 750 Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes): 100 100 100 Maximum permitted loads (**) STARTING AND DRIVING – total: WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 276 Towable loads: (°)Version for specific markets (*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to the maximum permitted loads. (**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads. TRUCK TRAILER WEIGHTS 3300 kg GVW versions 115 MultiJet (°) 110 (°)/130 MultiJet 180 MultiJet Power Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment) 1795 ÷ 1895 1810 ÷ 1910 1860 ÷ 1960 Payload (*) including the driver: 1405 ÷ 1435 1390 ÷ 1435 1340 ÷ 1440 – front axle: 1750 1750 1750 – rear axle: 1900 1900 1900 3230-3300 3245-3300 3245-3300 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY Maximum permitted loads (**) – total: Towable loads: – trailer with brakes: 2000 2500 2500 – trailer without brakes: 750 750 750 Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes): 100 100 100 (°)Version for specific markets (*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to the maximum permitted loads. (**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 277 TRUCK TRAILER WEIGHTS KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY 3500 kg GVW versions 115 MultiJet (°) 110 (°)/130 MultiJet 180 MultiJet Power Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment) 1795 ÷ 1895 1810 ÷ 1910 1860 ÷ 1960 Payload (*) including the driver: 1535 ÷ 1590 1535 ÷ 1590 1540 ÷ 1640 – front axle: 1850 1850 1850 – rear axle: 2000 2000 2000 3330-3500 3345-3500 3345-3500 – trailer with brakes: 2000 2500 2500 – trailer without brakes: 750 750 750 Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes): 100 100 100 Maximum permitted loads (**) STARTING AND DRIVING – total: WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 278 Towable loads: (°)Version for specific markets (*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to the maximum permitted loads. (**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads. TRAILER TRUCK WEIGHTS (MAXI versions) 3500 kg GVW versions 110 (°)/130 4000 kg GVW versions 180 MultiJet Power 110 (°)/130 MultiJet MultiJet 180 MultiJet Power Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment) 1895 ÷ 1985 1945 ÷ 2035 1895 ÷ 1985 1945 ÷ 2035 Payload (*) including the driver: 1515 ÷ 1605 1465 ÷ 1555 2015 ÷ 2105 1965 ÷ 2055 – front axle: 2100 2100 2100 2100 – rear axle: 2400 2400 2400 2400 – total: 3500 3500 4000 4000 – trailer with brakes: 2500 2500 2500 2500 – trailer without brakes: 750 750 750 750 Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes): 120 120 120 120 Maximum permitted loads (**) KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES Towable loads: (°)Version for specific markets (*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to the maximum permitted loads. (**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 279 WEIGHTS OF CHASSIS CAB FRAME WITH PLATFORM KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 3000 kg GVW versions 110 115 MultiJet (°) SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES 3300 kg GVW versions (°)/130/150 110 115 MultiJet (°) MultiJet Unladen weight (*) (with all fluids, fuel tank 90% full and without optional equipment) (°)/130/150 MultiJet 1600 1580 ÷ 1615 1580 ÷ 1615 1595 ÷ 1630 – front axle: 1630 1630 1750 1750 – rear axle: 1650 1650 1900 1900 – total: 3000 3000 3300 3300 – trailer with brakes: 2000 2500 2000 2500 – trailer without brakes: 750 750 750 750 Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes): 100 100 100 100 Maximum permitted loads (**) Towable loads: IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 280 (°)Version for specific markets (*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to the maximum permitted loads. (**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads. WEIGHTS OF CHASSIS CAB FRAME WITH PLATFORM 115 MultiJet (°) 110 (°)/130 MultiJet 1580 ÷ 1615 1595 ÷ 1630 – front axle: 1850 1850 – rear axle: 2000 2000 – total: 3500 3500 – trailer with brakes: 2000 2500 – trailer without brakes: 750 750 Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes): 100 100 3500 kg GVW versions Unladen weight (*) (with all fluids, fuel tank 90% full and without optional equipment) Maximum permitted loads (**) Towable loads: (°)Version for specific markets (*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to the maximum permitted loads. (**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 281 WEIGHTS OF CHASSIS CAB FRAME WITH PLATFORM (MAXI versions) KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES 3500 kg GVW versions 110 (°)/130 4000 kg GVW versions 180 MultiJet Power 110 (°)/130 MultiJet MultiJet 180 MultiJet Power Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment) 1655 ÷ 1685 1705 ÷ 1735 1655 ÷ 1685 1705 ÷ 1735 Payload (*) including the driver: 1815 ÷ 1845 1765 ÷ 1795 2315 ÷ 2345 2265 ÷ 2295 – front axle: 2100 2100 2100 2100 – rear axle: 2400 2400 2400 2400 – total: 3500 3500 4000 4000 – trailer with brakes: 3000 3000 2500 2500 – trailer without brakes: 750 750 750 750 Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes): 120 120 100 100 Maximum permitted loads (**) Towable loads: IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 282 (°)Version for specific markets (*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to the maximum permitted loads. (**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads. CHASSIS CAB FRAME WEIGHTS 115 MultiJet (#) (°) 110 (°)/130 MultiJet(#) 180 MultiJet Power(#) 1590 ÷ 1630 1605 ÷ 1635 1655 ÷ 1695 – front axle: 1630 1630 1630 – rear axle: 1650 1650 1650 – total: 3000 3000 3000 3000 kg GVW versions KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Unladen weight (*) (with all fluids, fuel tank 90% full and without optional equipment) SAFETY Maximum permitted loads (**) Towable loads: - braked trailer: 3000 3000 3000 – trailer without brakes: 750 750 750 Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes): 100 100 100 (#)Chassis version (°)Version for specific markets (*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to the maximum permitted loads. (**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 283 CHASSIS CAB FRAME WEIGHTS KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 284 3300 kg GVW versions 115 MultiJet (#) (°) 115 MultiJet (°) (°) 1590 ÷ 1640 1545 ÷ 1560 – front axle: 1750 1750 – rear axle: 1900 1900 – total: 3300 3300 - braked trailer: 3000 2000 – trailer without brakes: 750 750 Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes): 100 100 Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment) (*) Maximum permitted loads (**) Towable loads: (#)Chassis version (°)Version for specific markets (*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to the maximum permitted loads. (**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads. CHASSIS CAB FRAME WEIGHTS 3300 kg GVW versions 3300 kg GVW versions 110 (°)/130 MultiJet(#) 150 MultiJet(#) 150 MultiJet(°) 180 MultiJet Power(°) 1605 ÷ 1655 1605 ÷ 1655 1560 ÷ 1580 1655 ÷ 1705 – front axle: 1750 1750 1750 1750 – rear axle: 1900 1900 1900 1900 – total: 3300 3300 3300 3300 – trailer with brakes: 3000 3000 2500 2500 – trailer without brakes: 750 750 750 750 Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes): 100 100 100 100 Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment) (*) Maximum permitted loads (**) Towable loads: (°)Special version (#)Chassis version (*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to the maximum permitted loads. (**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 285 CHASSIS CAB FRAME WEIGHTS KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 286 3500 kg GVW versions 115 MultiJet (#) (°) 115 MultiJet (°) (°) 1590 ÷ 1640 1545 ÷ 1575 – front axle: 1850 1850 – rear axle: 2000 2000 – total: 3500 3500 - braked trailer: 3000 2000 – trailer without brakes: 750 750 Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes): 100 100 Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment) (*) Maximum permitted loads (**) Towable loads: (#)Chassis version (°)Version for specific markets (*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to the maximum permitted loads. (**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads. CHASSIS CAB FRAME WEIGHTS 3500 kg GVW versions 3500 kg GVW versions 110 (°)/130 MultiJet(#) 150 MultiJet(#) 150 MultiJet(°) 180 MultiJet Power(°) 1605 ÷ 1655 1605 ÷ 1655 1560 ÷ 1590 1655 ÷ 1705 – front axle: 1850 1850 1850 1850 – rear axle: 2000 2000 2000 2000 – total: 3500 3500 3500 3500 – trailer with brakes: 3000 3000 2500 2500 – trailer without brakes: 750 750 750 750 Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes): 100 100 100 100 Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment) (*) Maximum permitted loads (**) Towable loads: (°)Special version (#)Chassis version (*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to the maximum permitted loads. (**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 287 CHASSIS CAB FRAME WEIGHTS (MAXI versions) KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES 3500 kg GVW versions 3500 kg GVW versions 110 (°)/130 MultiJet(#) 180 MultiJet Power(#) 110 (°)/130 MultiJet(°) 180 MultiJet Power(°) Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment) 1675 ÷ 1710 1725 ÷ 1760 1610 ÷ 1630 1660 ÷ 1680 Payload (*) including the driver 1790 ÷ 1825 1740 ÷ 1775 1870 ÷ 1890 1820 ÷ 1840 – front axle: 2100 2100 2100 2100 – rear axle: 2400 2400 2400 2400 – total: 3500 3500 3500 3500 – trailer with brakes: 3000 3000 2500 2500 – trailer without brakes: 750 750 750 750 Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes): 120 120 120 120 Maximum permitted loads (**) Towable loads: IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 288 (°)Special version (#)Chassis version (*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to the maximum permitted loads. (**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads. CHASSIS CAB FRAME WEIGHTS (MAXI versions) 4000 kg GVW versions 4000 kg GVW versions 110 (°)/130 MultiJet(#) 180 MultiJet Power(#) 110 (°)/130 MultiJet(°) 180 MultiJet Power(°) Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment) 1675 ÷ 1710 1725 ÷ 1760 1610 ÷ 1630 1660 ÷ 1680 Payload (*) including the driver 2290 ÷ 2325 2240 ÷ 2275 2370 ÷ 2390 2320 ÷ 2340 – front axle: 2100 2100 2100 2100 – rear axle: 2400 2400 2400 2400 – total: 4000 4000 4000 4000 – trailer with brakes: 3000 3000 2500 2500 – trailer without brakes: 750 750 750 750 Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes): 100 100 100 100 Maximum permitted loads (**) KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES Towable loads: (°)Special version (#)Chassis version (*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to the maximum permitted loads. (**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 289 CHASSIS COWL WEIGHTS (MAXI versions) KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES 3500 kg GVW versions 3500 kg GVW versions 110 (°)/130 MultiJet(#) 180 MultiJet Power(#) 110 (°)/130 MultiJet(°) 180 MultiJet Power(°) Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment) 1375÷1410 1425 ÷ 1460 1310÷1330 1360 ÷ 1380 Payload (*) including the driver 2090÷2125 2040 ÷ 2075 2170 ÷ 2190 2120 ÷ 2140 – front axle: 2100 2100 2100 2100 – rear axle: 2400 2400 2400 2400 – total: 3500 3500 3500 3500 – trailer with brakes: 3000 3000 2500 2500 – trailer without brakes: 750 750 750 750 Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes): 120 120 120 120 Maximum permitted loads (**) Towable loads: IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 290 (°)Special version (#)Chassis version (*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to the maximum permitted loads. (**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads. CHASSIS COWL WEIGHTS (MAXI versions) 4000 kg GVW versions 4000 kg GVW versions 110 (°)/130 MultiJet(#) 180 MultiJet Power(#) 110 (°)/130 MultiJet(°) 180 MultiJet Power(°) Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment) 1375 ÷ 1410 1425 ÷ 1460 1310 ÷ 1330 1360 ÷ 1380 Payload (*) including the driver 2590 ÷ 2625 2540 ÷ 2575 2670 ÷ 2690 2620 ÷ 2640 – front axle: 2100 2100 2100 2100 – rear axle: 2400 2400 2400 2400 – total: 4000 4000 4000 4000 – trailer with brakes: 3000 3000 2500 2500 – trailer without brakes: 750 750 750 750 Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes): 100 100 100 100 Maximum permitted loads (**) KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES Towable loads: (°)Special version (#)Chassis version (*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to the maximum permitted loads. (**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 291 CREW CAB TRUCK WEIGHTS KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY 3300 kg GVW versions 115 MultiJet (°) 110 (°)/130 MultiJet 180 MultiJet Power Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment) 1950 ÷ 2010 1965 ÷ 2025 2015 ÷ 2075 Payload (*) including the driver: 1290 ÷ 1350 1275 ÷ 1335 1225 ÷ 1285 – front axle: 1750 1750 1750 – rear axle: 1900 1900 1900 – total: 3300 3300 3300 – trailer with brakes: 2000 2500 2500 – trailer without brakes: 750 750 750 Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes): 100 100 100 Maximum permitted loads (**) STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 292 Towable loads: (°)Version for specific markets (*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to the maximum permitted loads. (**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads. CREW CAB TRUCK WEIGHTS 3500 kg GVW versions 115 MultiJet (°) 110 (°)/130 MultiJet 180 MultiJet Power Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment) 1950 ÷ 2010 1965 ÷ 2025 2015 ÷ 2075 Payload (*) including the driver: 1490 ÷ 1550 1475 ÷ 1535 1425 ÷ 1485 – front axle: 1850 1850 1850 – rear axle: 2000 2000 2000 – total: 3500 3500 3500 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY Maximum permitted loads (**) Towable loads: – trailer with brakes: 2500 2500 2500 – trailer without brakes: 750 750 750 Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes): 120 120 120 (°)Version for specific markets (*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to the maximum permitted loads. (**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 293 CREW CAB TRUCK WEIGHTS (MAXI versions) KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 294 110 (°)/130 MultiJet 180 MultiJet Power Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment) 2005 ÷ 2105 2055 ÷ 2155 Payload (*) including the driver: 1395 ÷ 1495 1345 ÷ 1445 – front axle: 2100 2100 – rear axle: 2400 2400 – total: 3500 3500 – trailer with brakes: 2500 2500 – trailer without brakes: 750 750 Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes): 120 120 3500/4000 kg GVW versions Maximum permitted loads (**) Towable loads: (°)Version for specific markets (*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to the maximum permitted loads. (**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads. COMBI WEIGHTS 3000 kg GVW versions 115 MultiJet (°) 110 (°)/130 MultiJet 180 MultiJet Power Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment) 1935 1950 2000 Payload (*) including the driver: 1065 1050 1000 – front axle: 1600 1600 1600 – rear axle: 1650 1650 1650 – total: 3000 3000 3000 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY Maximum permitted loads (**) Towable loads: – trailer with brakes: 2000 2500 2500 – trailer without brakes: 750 750 750 Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes): 100 100 100 (°)Version for specific markets (*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to the maximum permitted loads. (**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 295 COMBI WEIGHTS KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES 3300 kg GVW versions 3500 kg GVW versions 115 MultiJet 110 (°)/130 MultiJet 180 MultiJet Power 110 (°)/130 (°) MultiJet 180 MultiJet Power Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment) 1935 ÷ 2045 1950 ÷ 2060 2000 ÷ 2100 2125 2175 Payload (*) including the driver: 1255 ÷ 1365 1240 ÷ 1350 1190 ÷ 1300 1375 1325 – front axle: 1750 1750 1750 1850 1850 – rear axle: 1900 1900 1900 2000 2000 – total: 3300 3300 3300 3500 3500 – trailer with brakes: 2000 2500 2500 2500 2500 – trailer without brakes: 750 750 750 750 750 Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes): 100 100 100 100 100 Maximum permitted loads (**) Towable loads: IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 296 (°)Version for specific markets (*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to the maximum permitted loads. (**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads. COMBI WEIGHTS (MAXI versions) 110 (°)/130 MultiJet 180 MultiJet Power Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment) 2100 2150 Payload (*) including the driver: 1400 1350 – front axle: 2100 2100 – rear axle: 2400 2400 – total: 3500 3500 – trailer with brakes: 3000 3000 – trailer without brakes: 750 750 Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes): 120 120 3500 kg GVW versions Maximum permitted loads (**) Towable loads: (°)Version for specific markets (*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to the maximum permitted loads. (**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 297 PANORAMA WEIGHTS KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY 3000 kg GVW versions 115 MultiJet (°) 110 (°)/130 MultiJet 180 MultiJet Power Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment) 2200 2215 2265 Payload (*) including the driver: 800 785 735 – front axle: 1630 1630 1630 – rear axle: 1650 1650 1650 – total: 3000 3000 3000 – trailer with brakes: 2000 2500 2500 – trailer without brakes: 750 750 750 Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes): 100 100 100 Maximum permitted loads (**) STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 298 Towable loads: (°)Version for specific markets (*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to the maximum permitted loads. (**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads. PANORAMA WEIGHTS 3300 kg GVW versions 115 MultiJet (°) 110 (°)/130 MultiJet 180 MultiJet Power Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment) 2200÷ 2285 2215 ÷ 2300 2265 ÷ 2350 Payload (*) including the driver: 1015 ÷ 1100 1000 ÷ 1085 950 ÷ 1035 – front axle: 1750 1750 1750 – rear axle: 1900 1900 1900 – total: 3300 3300 3300 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY Maximum permitted loads (**) Towable loads: – trailer with brakes: 2000 2500 2500 – trailer without brakes: 750 750 750 Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes): 100 100 100 (°)Version for specific markets (*)If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload with respect to the maximum permitted loads. (**)Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 299 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 300 REFUELLING 115 MultiJet (°) 110 (°)/130 MultiJet 150 MultiJet 180 MultiJet Power Fuel tank including a reserve of (litres): 90 (*) 90 (*) 90 (*) 90 (*) including a reserve of (litres): 10/12 10/12 10/12 10/12 Engine cooling system (litres): 8 (**) 9,6 (**) 9,6 (**) 10 (**) Engine sump (litres): 4,9 5,3 5,3 8 Engine sump and filter (litres): 5,7 5,9 5,9 9 - 2.7 (MLGU gearbox) 2,7 - Gearbox casing/differential (litres): Prescribed fuels and original lubricants Diesel for motor vehicles (EN590 specification) 50-50 mixture of water and PARAFLU UP (***) SELENIA WR P.E. TUTELA CAR EXPERYA (°)Version for specific markets (*) A 120 litre tank is available on request for all versions (with reserve of 12 litres). With the "Recreational" option a 60 litre tank is available on request (with reserve of 10 litres). (**) With Webasto: + 1/4 litre - Underseat heater 600 cc: + 1 litre - Rear heater 900 cc: + 1.5 litres (***) For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% UP and 40% demineralised water is recommended. 115 MultiJet (°) 110 (°)/130 MultiJet 150 MultiJet 180 MultiJet Power Prescribed fuels and original lubricants 2.9 TUTELA TRANSMISSION GEARTECH Gearbox/differential casing (litres): 2.9 2.9 (M38 gearbox) Hydraulic braking circuit with ABS (kg): 0,6 0,6 0,6 0,6 Hydraulic braking circuit with ASR/ESP (kg): 0,62 0,62 0,62 0,62 Hydraulic power steering: 1,5 1,5 1,5 1,5 TUTELA CAR GI/E Windscreen/headlight washer reservoir: 5,5 5,5 5,5 5,5 Mixture of water and TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC35 (°)Version for specific markets KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY TUTELA TOP 4 STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 301 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the requirements of the Scheduled Servicing Plan. Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emission specifications. Lubricant quality is crucial for engine operation and duration. SAFETY RECOMMENDED PRODUCTS AND THEIR SPECIFICATIONS STARTING AND DRIVING Fluid and lubricant features for a correct use of the car Use Diesel engine lubricants SAE 5W-30 grade synthetic based lubricants Classification FIAT 9.55535-S1 ACEA C2. Genuine fluids and lubricants SELENIA WR P.E. Contractual Technical Reference No. F510.D07 Replacement interval According to Scheduled Servicing Plan WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES In case of emergency, if the above specified lubricants are not available, products with the minimum indicated ACEA performance can be used for topping up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed. IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 302 The use of products with different specifications than those indicated above could cause damage to the engine that are not covered by the warranty. Use Lubricants and greases for drive transmission Brake fluid Fluid and lubricant features for a correct use of the car Genuine fluids and lubricants Applications KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAE 75W- 80 grade synthetic lubricant. Classification FIAT 9.55550-MZ2. TUTELA TRANSMISSION EXPERYA Contractual Technical Reference No. F178.B06 Manual gearbox and differential SAE 75W-85 grade synthetic lubricant Classification FIAT 9.55550-MZ3 TUTELA TRANSMISSION GEARTECH Contractual Technical Reference No. F704.C08 Manual gearbox and differential STARTING AND DRIVING Molybdenum disulphide grease, for use at high temperatures. Classification FIAT 9.55580. Consistency NLGI 1-2 TUTELA ALL STAR Contractual Technical Reference No. F702.G07 Wheel side constant velocity joints WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES Grease for constant velocity joints with low friction coefficient. Classification FIAT 9.55580. Consistency NLGI 0-1 TUTELA STAR 700 Contractual Technical Reference No. F701.C07 Differential side constant velocity joints Lubricant for power steering Exceeds "ATF DEXRON III" specifications Classification FIAT 9.55550-AG2. TUTELA TRANSMISSION GI/E Contractual Technical Reference No. F001.C94 Hydraulic power steering Synthetic fluid for brake and clutch systems Exceeds specifications: FMVSS no. 116 DOT 4, ISO 4925, SAE J 1704 Classification FIAT 9.55597. TUTELA TOP 4 Contractual Technical Reference No. F001.A93 Hydraulic brakes and clutch controls SAFETY IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 303 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 304 Genuine fluids and lubricants Applications Protective agent for radiators Red protective agent with antifreeze action, based on inhibited monoethylene glycol with organic formula. Exceeds CUNA NC 956-16, ASTM D 3306 specifications. FIAT Classification 9.55523. PARAFLUUP (*) Contractual Technical Reference No. F101.M01 Cooling circuits Use rate 50% up to -35°C. Mixture with different formulation products not allowed. Diesel fuel additive Additive for diesel antifreeze, protecting diesel engines. TUTELA DIESEL ART Contractual Technical Reference No. F601.L06 To be mixed with diesel (25 cc per 10 litres) Windscreen washer fluid Mixture of alcohol and surfactants CUNA NC 956-II. FIAT Classification 9.55522. TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35 Contractual Technical Reference No. F201.D02 To be used diluted or undiluted in windscreen/rear window washer/wiper systems Use Fluid and lubricant features for a correct use of the car (*)When the vehicle is used in particularly harsh weather conditions, we recommend using a 60-40 mixture of PARAFLU UP and distilled water. FUEL CONSUMPTION The fuel consumption figures given in the tables below are determined on the basis of the type-approval tests laid down by specific European Directives. The procedures below are followed for measuring consumption: ❒ urban cycle: begins with cold starting, followed by driving simulating the use of the vehicle in town; ❒ extra-urban cycle: driving that simulates using the vehicle out of town with frequent acceleration in all gears; the speed varies from 0 to 120 km/h; ❒ combined fuel consumption: calculated with a weighting of approximately 37% of the urban cycle and 63% of the extra-urban cycle. IMPORTANT The type of route, traffic situations, weather conditions, driving style, general conditions of the vehicle, trim level/equipment/accessories, climate control system, vehicle load, roof rack, other situations that affect air drag may lead to different fuel consumption levels than those measured. Gross vehicle weight PANORAMA STARTING AND DRIVING Consumption Urban Extra-urban Combi 115 MultiJet (°) 3,000 – 3,300 kg 8,6 6,0 7,0 110 (°)/130 MultiJet 3,000 – 3,300 kg 8,7 6,1 7,1 150 MultiJet 3,000 – 3,300 kg 8,7 6,1 7,1 180 MultiJet Power 3,000 – 3,300 kg 10,7 6,4 8,0 (°)Version for specific markets SAFETY WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES Fuel consumption (according to the current European Directive - litres/100 km) Versions KNOW YOUR VEHICLE IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 305 Fuel consumption (according to the current European Directive - litres/100 km) KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Versions Gross vehicle weight COMBI SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING 115 MultiJet (°) 110 (°)/130 MultiJet WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES 150 MultiJet IN AN EMERGENCY 180 MultiJet Power SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 306 (°)Version for specific markets Consumption Urban Extra-urban Combi 3,000 kg 8,0 5,4 6,4 3,300 kg 8,3 5,7 6,7 3,500 kg 8,3 5,7 6,7 3,000 kg 8,3 5,6 6,6 3,300 kg 8,5 5,9 6,9 3,500 kg 8,5 5,9 6,9 3,000 kg 8,3 5,6 6,6 3,300 kg 8,5 5,9 6,9 3,500 kg 8,5 5,9 6,9 3,000 kg 9,5 5,5 7,0 3,300 kg 10,3 6,0 7,6 3,500 kg 10,7 6,4 8,0 Fuel consumption (according to the current European Directive - litres/100 km) Consumption 115 MultiJet(°) Versions Gross vehicle weight Van CH1/Box truck CH1 MH1 MLH1/ Cab chassis and double cab (*)/ Flatbed Urban Extra-urb. Combi 2800, 3000, 3300, 3500 8,0 6,1 6,8 Van MH1 LH1/box truck LH1/double cab, MH1 3000, 3300, 3500 8,2 6,3 7,0 Van LH1/Double cab LH1 3300, 3500 8,5 6,5 7,2 Van CH1/Box truck CH1 MH1/Cab chassis and double cab (*)/ Flatbed cab 3000, 3300, 3500 8,3 6,4 7,1 MultiJet Van CH1 MH1/box truck MH1 MLH1 LH1/double cab, MH1 3000, 3300, 3500, 3500 Maxi, 4005, 4250 Maxi 8,5 6,4 7,2 Van LH1/Double cab LH1, MH1 3300, 3500, 3500 Maxi, 4005, 4250 Maxi 8,8 6,6 7,4 SAFETY cab (*)/Chassis cowl (*) (*)/Chassis cowl (*) 110 (°)/130 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE (°)Version for specific markets (*)Such consumption should be understood as referring to vehicles before conversion STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 307 Consumption KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY 180 MultiJet Power Versions Gross vehicle weight Box truck CH1/Cab chassis and double cab (*)/Flatbed cab (*)/Chassis cowl (*) Van CH1 MH1/box truck MH1 MLH1 LH1 Urban Extra-urb. Combi 3000, 3300, 3500 9,7 6,5 7,7 3000, 3300, 3500 10,1 6,7 8,0 3500 Heavy, 4005, 4250 Maxi 10,3 6,8 8,1 Cab chassis (*)/Chassis cowl (*) 3300, 3500, 3650, 3500 Maxi, 4005, 4250 Maxi 10,6 7,0 8,3 Van MH1 LH1/box truck LH1/double cab, MH1 LH1 3500 Maxi, 4005, 4250 Maxi 10,9 7,0 8,4 Van LH1/Box truck LH1/Double cab MH1 LH1 3300, 3500 11,1 7,1 8,5 Van CH1/Box truck MH1 MLH1/Cab chassis and double cab (*)/ Flatbed cab (*)/Chassis cowl (*) (*)Such consumption should be understood as referring to vehicles before conversion SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 308 CO2 EMISSIONS The CO2 emission levels given in the following tables refer to combined consumption. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE CO2 emissions (according to the current European Directive litres/100 km) Gross vehicle weight Emissions 115 MultiJet (°) 3,000 – 3,300 kg 182 110 (°)130 MultiJet 3,000 – 3,300 kg 186 150 MultiJet 3,000 – 3,300 kg 186 180 MultiJet Power 3,000 – 3,300 kg 210 Versions SAFETY PANORAMA (°)Version for specific markets STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 309 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE CO2 emissions (according to the current European Directive g/km) Versions Gross vehicle weight Emissions 3,000 kg 166 3,300 kg 174 3,500 kg 182 3,000 kg 173 3,300 kg 180 3,500 kg 180 3,000 kg 173 3,300 kg 180 3,500 kg 180 3,000 kg 184 3,300 kg 200 3,500 kg 210 COMBI SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING 115 MultiJet 110 (°)/130 MultiJet WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES 150 MultiJet IN AN EMERGENCY 180 MultiJet Power SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 310 (°)Version for specific markets CO2 emissions (according to the current European Directive g/km) 115 MultiJet 110 (°)/130 MultiJet 180 MultiJet Power CO2 emissions Versions Gross vehicle weight Van CH1/Box truck CH1 MH1 MLH1/Cab chassis and double cab (*)/ Flatbed cab (*)/Chassis cowl (*) 2800, 3000, 3300, 3500 179 Van MH1 LH1/box truck LH1/double cab, MH1 3000, 3300, 3500 185 Van LH1/Double cab LH1 3300, 3500 190 Van CH1/Box truck CH1 MH1/Cab chassis and double cab (*)/ Flatbed cab (*)/Chassis cowl (*) 3000, 3300, 3500 186 Van CH1 MH1/box truck MH1 MLH1 LH1/double cab, MH1 3000, 3300, 3500, 3500 Maxi, 4005, 4250 Maxi 189 Van LH1/Double cab LH1, MH1 3300, 3500, 3500 Maxi, 4005, 4250 Maxi 195 Box truck CH1/Cab chassis and double cab (*)/ Flatbed cab (*)/Chassis cowl (*) 3000, 3300, 3500 203 Van CH1 MH1/box truck MH1 MLH1 LH1 3000, 3300, 3500 209 Van CH1/Box truck MH1 MLH1/Cab chassis and double cab (*)/ Flatbed cab (*)/Chassis cowl (*) 3500 Maxi, 4005, 4250 Maxi 213 Cab chassis (*)/Chassis cowl (*) 3300, 3500, 3650, 3500 Maxi, 4005, 4250 Maxi 219 Van MH1 LH1/box truck LH1/double cab, MH1 LH1 3500 Maxi, 4005, 4250 Maxi 222 Van LH1/Box truck LH1/Double cab MH1 LH1 3300, 3500 224 (*)Such consumption should be understood as referring to vehicles before conversion (°)Version for specific markets Combi KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 311 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 312 PRESCRIPTIONS FOR HANDLING THE VEHICLE AT THE END OF ITS LIFE Fiat has been committed for many years to safeguarding the environment through the constant improvement of its production processes and manufacturing products that are increasingly "eco-compatible". To assure customers of the best possible service in terms of respecting environmental laws and in response to European Directive 2000/53/EC governing vehicles at the end of their life, Fiat is offering their customers the opportunity of handing over their vehicle(*) at the end of its life without incurring any additional costs. The European Directive sets out that when the vehicle is handed over the last keeper or owner should not incur any expenses as a result of it having a zero or negative market value. In particular, in almost all European Union countries, until 1st January 2007, vehicles registered after 1st July 2002 will be collected free of charge, whilst from 2007 collection will be free of charge irrespective of the year of registration as long as the vehicle contains its basic components (in particular, the engine and bodywork) and has no additional waste. To hand your vehicle over at the end of its life without extra cost, go to one of our Dealerships or Fiat-authorised collection and scrapping centres. These centres have been carefully chosen to offer high quality service for the collection, treatment and recycling of vehicles at their end of life, respecting the surrounding environment. You can find further information on these collection and scrapping centres either from a Fiat and Fiat Commercial Vehicle Dealership or by calling the toll-free number 00800 3428 0000 or on the Fiat website. (*) Vehicle for transporting passengers with a maximum of nine seats and a total permitted weight of 3.5 t OFFICIAL TYPE APPROVALS KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 313 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 314 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 315 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 316 ® ® NOTES INDEX ABS failure warning light......... 173 ABS................................................ 109 ABS (system failure warning light)............................................ 173 Additional heater ........................ 59 Additional rear climate control (Panorama/Combi) .... 66 Additional rear heating (Panorama/Combi) ................... 65 Advice for extending battery life ................................. 240 Air bag failure warning light..... 169 Air bag (failure warning light)............................................ 169 Air bags (general warnings) ..... 149 Air cleaner................................... 238 Air suspension............................. 96 Arrangement possibilities for Universal Isofix child seat on seats of vehicle .......... 143 Ashtray.......................................... 89 ASR system ................................. 113 Automatic climate control ....... 53 Automatic headlight sensor ..... 70 Battery (charge)........................ 219 Battery (disconnector) .............. Battery disconnector ................. Battery – Replacement.......................... Battery (low charge warning light)............................................ Battery replacement ................. body paintwork identification plate ................... Bodywork – Advice for preserving the bodywork............................... – Exterior and underbody warranty ................................. – Protection from atmospheric agents.............. Bodywork version ..................... Bonnet.......................................... Book rest...................................... Brake fluid/handbrake warning light.............................. Brake fluid.................................... Brake fluid (warning light ......... Brake pads (wear warning light)............................................ Brake pad wear warning light ............................................. 81 Brakes (brake pad wear 81 warning light) ............................ Brakes – specifications ......................... 239 Bulbs 170 – types of bulbs........................ 239 Bump starting ............................. Cab glove compartment .......... 253 Camera and display for rear visibility ....................................... Capucine ....................................... 247 Central locking............................ Changing a bulb.......................... 247 Chassis marking.......................... Checking and restoring 246 pressure ..................................... 254 Checking fluid levels.................. 105 Children (safe transport) 90 – Arrangement possibilities for child seats........................ 168 – Child seats ............................. 235 – Safety regulations ................. 168 Cigar lighter ................................. Clutch........................................... 177 CO2 emissions........................... Compartment beneath 177 passenger side front seat ........ 177 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 259 197 182 91 92 91 82 195 253 194 228 139 135 140 88 258 309 SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 87 321 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 322 159 DPF (Particulate filter) ............. 128 78 Driving style ................................ 158 74 EBD (system)............................. 110 195 Electrical power supply and Daytime running lights....... 67-201 fuel cut-off switch..................... 83 Dead lock .................................... 100 Electric windows........................ 104 Demanding vehicle use............. 227 Electronic alarm .......................... 10 Desk/Book rest ........................... 90 Engine codes ............................... 254 Diesel filter (water warning Engine coolant ............................ 233 light)............................................ 174 Engine coolant temperature Diffusers........................................ 45 gauge............................................ 15 Dimensions ................................. 265 Engine coolant (warning Dipped beam headlights..... 68-201 light)............................................ 170 – Warning light......................... 178 Engine coolant warning light ... 170 Direction indicators ............ 69-202 Engine ........................................... 256 Engine marking ........................... 253 – Left direction indicator warning light .......................... 178 Engine oil (insufficient – Right direction indicator pressure warning light) ........... 170 warning light .......................... 178 Engine oil ..................................... 232 Door pockets .............................. 87 Engine oil level gauge ................. 16 Doors ............................................ 97 EOBD system ............................. 116 DPF (particulate filter) ESP (system) ............................... 111 cleaning in progress warning light.............................. 176 ESP/Traction Plus system failure warning light ................. 177 DPF (particulate filter) ESP/Traction Plus (system (cleaning in progress warning light) ............................ 176 failure warning light)................ 177 Conditions of use ...................... Controls........................................ Cruise control ............................. Cylinder replacement ............... External light failure warning light ............................................. 175 External lights (failure warning light) ............................ 175 External lights.............................. 67 Fiat CODE system .................... 4 Fiat CODE (vehicle protection system failure warning light) ............................ 175 Fix&Go Automatic fast tyre repair kit ........... 190-192-194-195 Flap on bench.......................... 34-91 Flashing.......................................... 69 Fluids and lubricants.................. 302 Fog lights................................ 79-203 – Warning light......................... 178 Fog lights warning light............. 178 Follow me home device ............ 70 Follow me home ......................... 70 Front air bags.............................. 144 – Front driver side air bag ..... 145 – Front passenger side air bag ........................................... 145 – Manually deactivating the front air bag and side bag ... 146 Front roof light (replacing a bulb)............................................ 208 Fuel consumption ...................... Fuel level gauge ........................... Fuel reserve warning light........ Fuel (reserve warning light)..... Fuel supply................................... Fuel tank cap............................... Fuses (replacement) .................. 305 Headlights 15 – Headlight alignment corrector................................ 108 173 173 – Light beam direction ........... 108 257 Headlight washers ............... 73-245 127 Head restraints 210 – Front ........................................ 38 Heated rear window.................. 80 Gearbox ...................................... 155 Heating and ventilation Gear lever.................................... 155 controls....................................... 46 General failure warning light ... 175 Heating and ventilation ............. 44 Hill Holder (system) ................. 112 General failure (warning light)............................................ 175 Identification data ..................... 252 Glove compartment.............. 85-86 Ignition device ............................. 11 Glove compartment with In an emergency......................... 181 lock .............................................. 85 Incomplete door/load Glow plug heating failure compartment closure ............. 172 warning light.............................. 174 Independent supplementary Glow plug heating warning heater .......................................... 60 light ............................................. 174 Inflation pressure ....................... 264 Glow plugs (heating/heating Inflation procedure.................... 192 failure warning light)................ 174 Injection system Handbrake (warning light........ 168 failure/EOBD engine management system failure Hazard warning lights ................ 78 warning light.............................. 172 Headlight alignment Injection system (failure corrector ................................... 108 warning light) ............................ 172 Instrument panel ...................... 3-13 Insufficient engine oil pressure warning light............. Interior fittings ............................ Interiors ....................................... Isofix child seats (setup) – Arrangement possibilities for child seat on seats of vehicle ..................................... 170 85 250 SAFETY 143 Jump starting .............................. 181 Left direction indicator warning light ............................. Light beam direction ................. Lights off ....................................... Loading advice ............................ Low battery charge warning light ............................................. KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 178 108 67 156 170 STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY Main beam headlights ........ 68-200 Maintenance and care regular checks........................... Maintenance and care Scheduled Servicing................. Maintenance and care scheduled servicing plan......... Manual climate control.............. Manually deactivating the front air bag and side bag....... Moving footboard ...................... 227 223 224 49 146 102 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 323 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 324 Right direction indicator warning light.............................. 178 Rim Protector............................. 262 Rims and tyres............................ 260 Roof lights .................................... 76 Roof rack ..................................... 107 Rubber hoses .............................. 243 Saving fuel ................................... 157 SBR system.................................. 131 Seat base plastic covers............. 35 Seat belts – Use .......................................... 129 Seat belts not fastened............. 172 Seats (Combi versions) ............. 36 Seats............................................... 30 Seats (Panorama version) ......... 36 Seats with adjustable armrests...................................... 32 Seat with revolving base............ 32 Setup for Isofix child seat ........ 141 Shelf above cab............................ 90 Side bags ...................................... 146 Side lights ...................... 68-200-208 Ski rack......................................... 107 Sliding door ................................. 100 Revolving seat with seat Prescriptions for vehicle at end of life................................... 312 belts ............................................. 33 Sliding side window ................... 101 114 Pretensioners.............................. 131 Prolonged vehicle inactivity ..... 167 17 Protecting the environment .... 128 19 Radio............................................ 123 17 Rain sensor................................... 73 Number plate lights.................. 207 Raising the vehicle ..................... 220 On board instruments .............. 14 Rear door with two wings....... 102 Parking......................................... 153 Rear fog lights ....................... 80-205 Parking lights ........................... 69-80 – Warning light......................... 175 Rear fog light warning light...... 175 Parking sensor failure warning light.............................. 177 Rear partition .............................. 87 Parking sensors (failure Rear roof light (replacing a warning light) ............................ 177 bulb)............................................ 209 Parking sensors .......................... 117 Rear view camera ....................... 92 Particulate filter (DPF) ............. 128 Rear view mirrors....................... 40 Passenger side air bag/side Refrigerated compartment....... 85 bags (warning light) ................. 173 Refuelling...................................... 300 Passenger side air bags/side bags deactivated....................... 173 Refuelling the vehicle ................ 126 Performance................................ 271 Replacing a wheel....................... 183 Pollen filter .................................. 238 Replacing exterior bulbs........... 199 Portable navigator socket ......... 91 Replacing interior bulbs............ 208 Power socket ............................... 89 Replacing the wiper blades ...... 244 Power steering fluid .................. 236 Rev counter.................................. 14 MSR system................................. Multifunction display – Control buttons .................... – Setup menu............................. – Standard screen..................... Snow chains................................. 166 Snow tyres................................... 165 Spare wheel................................. 260 Speed block.................................. 95 Speedometer ............................... 14 Spray nozzles .............................. 245 Sprung seat................................... 31 Starting the engine.... 151-181-182 Start&Stop system..................... 119 Steering ........................................ 259 Steering wheel............................. 39 Stopping the engine................... 153 Sun visors ..................................... 89 Suspension................................... 258 Symbols ......................................... 4 Tachograph ................................. third brake lights ........................ Towing the vehicle..................... Towing trailers............................ Traction Plus system ................. Transmission ............................... Tray under seat ........................... Trip computer ............................. Tyres ............................................. Upper storage compartment............................. 85 Vehicle protection system failure warning light (Fiat CODE)....................................... 175 VIN plate...................................... 252 KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY Warming up the engine just after it has started .................. 152 Warning lights and messages .. 168 Washer fluid for windscreen/rear window ....... 234 Water in diesel filter sensor.... 174 Weights ........................................ 272 Wheel geometry........................ 260 Wheels and tyres....................... 241 Wheels ......................................... 260 94 Window cleaning ........................ 71 206 Windscreen wiper ............ 72-244 221 160 115 258 35 27 260 STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES IN AN EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX 325 Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A. - Parts & Services - Technical Services - Service Engineering Largo Senatore G. Agnelli, 3 - 10040 Volvera - Turin (Italy) Print no. 603.99 .321 - 05 /2013 - 1st Edition DUCATO LUM GB 17-12-2008 9:57 Pagina 1 F I A T D U C A T ENGLISH The data contained in this publication is intended merely as a guide. FIAT reserves the right to modify the models and versions described in this booklet at any time for technical and commercial reasons. If you have any further questions please consult your FIAT dealer. Printed in recycled paper without chlorine. O W N E R H A N D B O O K O